modem user’s guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • at command set • v.25 bis autodialer •...

270
3600 Modem User’s Guide

Upload: others

Post on 14-Mar-2020

1 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

3600Modem User’s Guide

Page 2: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

ii Modem 3600

TrademarksAny trademarks mentioned in this manual are acknowledged to be the property of the trademark owners.

Page 3: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

���������� �������

������������ ���

������������� �������������������������������� ������������

����������������������������������������������������� ���� ��

������!���"��#��������� �����������$������������������������

���%��$������������

������������������������������������� �������������������� �� ����

���������������� ����&������������������� ������������������ �������������

�����������'������������������������ (������������������������������

������������������������%������%��������������������$� ���$�����

��������

���������������������������������������$��� � ���%����%�������%�

���� �����%�������������������)�����������&���������$����������$�����

�� � ��� ���� �������������������������* ����$� ��!+�,"������� ��%����

��������� ���%������������������*�������$���%���� �������

�����

-� �����%��$�.�� ������/�� � ��0�������������!./0�"���������������

1� (������� ��������$�����$$�������%����$��� � ��������� � ��������./0��

1� (����������$�����������������2334�253/426��

������������� ���%��%� �������� ��� ������������������ �������

�$$� �����%�������������#���������������$�����$� ������������ �� �����

�� ��%����������������������������������������������� � ��

)$�%����*����� ������������������������������������&������� ���� �

Black Boxat 724-746-5500

$�����$������������������������ � �������������������������� ���%�

�%���(������%������ ���� ���������������$�������������(�����������

�������������������� ����)$�%������������ �����������������������

������(�������������� ���%��%���������%���� ���� ����� � ���)$�

������ ����%�������������$������$�%�������������$������ ������������

��������

��������

Page 4: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

�� ������������������

��������������%���������������� ������� � ���� ������%�����

��������� ���%������� �����������%�������������1� ���������������$$��

-������ ���������������� ������������������������� ����������

������������&���� ����������������� ���� ������������������������(�

������������������������� ���������������1� (�����������������

��������/���������������������� ����������������7&�)������������$���

��������

���������� �� ���������� ���������������������������� �����- ���$�3883��(�����������$���$���

��%���������������� ������������������ ����� ��� � ������������%�

������� �������������&�$�*�� ����&����������������� ���������

�����%� ���������������������������������������$��� �������������

��������������$����������$����������������&�����������������������������

�������������$� �������$����������������������������%&�������������� ������

�������������������������������������������$�������������� �����

����� ����������&������������%�������� ������

�����������$��������$�������������$�� ������$�����$�*���$��������� ��

��������%���� �������)������������������������$�������&�������

������������� ������������ ����������%����$�*���$������

�������������������� ������ �����

������� ��������� �!" ������#���$�������%&''(�����)*��+���� �� �

������ �����������������&����������&����� �����������������

$������ %������%������$����������������� ���� �������

�$������������������������� �������������������� �����

�������)���������������������� ���������������������

$�����������9� ��������� � ��� �������������������&�

�����3+��0���������$������������������������������������

�%� ����������$���� ���)$��������&�%������� ���� ������

������$����������$���� ��

��������������$� �������������������������*�����%���� ����%�����

���%������������$��� ����� �� ����� ������������:����������%����

�������������������

� ��������

Page 5: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

�� ������������������

",���������-������������ ���������������������� ���������������������$�����������9�

��������� � ����������������������������������� ������ ��������

.���������������� ������ ����� �����%�����%������������* ����������

$������ %&��� ������������ ��� ���$������$���� ������� ��%����������

�������������������� �����%����������������� ������ �����������%����

�������������

��������� �!" ��#./������#���$�������%&''(�������,��+���� �

������ �����������������&����������&����� �����������������

$������ %������%������$����������������� ���� �������

�$������������������������� �������������������� �����

�������)���������������������� ���������������������

$�����������-� ��������� � ��� �������������������&�

�����3+��0���������$������������������������������������

�%� ����������$���� ���)$��������&�%������� ���� ������

������$����������$���� ��

��������������$� �������������������������*�����%���� ����%�����

���%������������$��� ����� �� ����� ������������:����������%����

�������������������

",���������-������������ ���������������������� ���������������������$�����������-�

��������� � ����������������������������������� ������ ��������

.���������������� ������ ����� �����%�����%������������* ����������

$������ %&��� ������������ ��� ���$������$���� ������� ��%����������

�������������������� �����%����������������� ������ �����������%����

�������������

�������� �

Page 6: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

�� ������������������

"0�������������� �������� ���

���������������������*����$�������� ���� ���������� ���

���$� ������$���������������������� ������������������������������

������� �������$�����)�������������� �������������;��� ��&� ������������

���� ���������� ����������������������)������������������� �����)��

�������������)$������������� ��������)���������������������$$�*����������

������

� ������� ����1��2��������� ��)��������������$$�*�������� ������������������������������������������

����$� ������������$������������ ����������������������������$$������

$����� �������

����)������%��������������������$���� ����$������������������

����$� ��������������������������������� �������

���� ���� �������������(����� �� �&�����������&�������$��%�

�������������)����������������������������������������������������

����:�������$� �����

9�$���������������������������&��������������������������������

���������������� ���� �����������$� ���������$������� ���

���� ���� ������� ���%������������������������������������

���������� ��������������$� ���� ������)������ ����&����� ���%:��

������������������ ����������������������������� ��������� � ���%����

�*��������%�������$��� ����$���� ���� ����������%�!���������

�*�������� ���"������ ���������������������������� ����� �����������

��� �� �����������%������� �����������������$���� � ���������

�����������

���������� ����$���������������������������%�����������<���

����������������� ��$� ����%�������������%�������������-�%��������

��������������������%�������������������������&������������

��$�� �����&��%��� ���������� ���� ������� ���%� ��������

����������������������� ���� ��������������������������������� �����

�������������������������������� ��� ���������� ���� �������$����������

������%&����������������������������������� �����������%���&��$�

������&����� ���� ��������������������� ��������%�������� �����%�

�����������������������

� ��������

Page 7: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

�� ������������������

�������=�.��������������������������(��������������� ���� ������

������ ��&������������ ���� ������������������ ��� ����� �����

��������%������� ��� ����

�� ��� ���+��� ���#��-���������������� ���� ��������!���"��������������� ����������

�� � ���� ������������ �������$������*����������$����������

�������������� ���� �����������������������$� ������������������������

�����$� ���%� ��������$���%� �����������$��� � ������1� �����%��������

������������������������$���������������� ���� ����������$���������

�� � �������������* ����$� ��!+"��

�*#*��*#� ��""��#�� 3!�� � #4"�1������%&''(�����)��2�����������9���������������������������������������$��������������

)����$���� �'����������������������������

�������������>������������ ������9����� ���������������*���� ������

�?����������������>��������������������������

�*#*��*#� ��""��#�� 3!�� � #4"�1������%&''(���,��+���� �2�����������-���������������������������������������$��������������

)����$���� �'����������������������������

�������������>������������ ������-����� ���������������*���� ������

�?����������������>��������������������������

�������� �

Page 8: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

�� ������������������

#�����#��������������������� ���1#��2 ���������"�����"������ �

�#"4�!����# "�� �" 5!���*�

3" ���������������� �������������������%����� �@�������A������

��B�����������������������������> ��� ��������������

7" ���������� �������������������%����� �@�������A������

����������������$���� ���$�������

C" ������������ ����� �������������������> ��� ��%��������

������ ������������� �@�����������������������

5" ���������������� ������������� �@��%�������������������������

+" ������������> ��� ����������A����������� �� ����������D���

�1���&� �� ������������������E�&��� ���&��@������1������ �� ��

������������ �&��� ���

�" ������������> ��� �����������������F�� ������ ��� ����������

��������������������� ���������������$���� ������

G" �����������> ��� ����������������������������������� ����@���

��������� ��������������$���� ������

�" /�� � ��D����������������������������������� � ������������

��> ��� ��A�����A��������� ������������������ ������������� �@���

������������� � ��������A�������$���������������������� � ���

���$� �����

8" ������������> ��� ���������������������������������������

��� �@����������$���������������� ��� � �@���������������> ��� ��

���������� ��&���$A&���$�����������$� ���������������

����������� ������ �@�&������������ ��� ���������������������������

�������������$��1��������������������$� ������� ������ �@���

3," �����������> ��� ��������������������$����������� �� �����$�������

��� ����� �������������&�������������� ����&�����$�����������

��������!�� ��%��������$� ������"��������� ��� ������

33" ������������> ��� �������A����� ���� �����������$��������������

�@�������������� ����������������� �� ��������� �@�&��� ������

����������������������

37" ��� �� �@��������������������������������������������$��� ��%����

�����<� �@�����������������������������

� ��������

Page 9: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

�� ������������������

3C" ���� ������������$���������������������������������������������

��������������������������< ����������1����� ��� �������������

�����������&������������� ��������� �@�������� ���� ����%�

�� �� �����������������������������

35" �����������> ��� ������������������F�� ���������� ��������

������ ����� ����������$���� ������

3+" ��� ��������*�����&�������������*�����������A������� ���<������1���

��������������������������

3�" ��� �������� ��������������A�������� ��� ��������� ���������

�����������������������������������������������

3G" ������������������������������������������1� ����������������

������������������������ �������������$� ������� ������ �@���

3�" /�� � �������������� ���$� ���������A������� ����� �����=�

�" ��� ������������������ ���� �������������E���H���

�" 0�1� �������� �B������B����������������������������������

������H���

" �������������������*�������������� ��H���

�" ������������� ���������������������������������

����������������E�H���

�" ������������������������������ ������������������E�����

�������� �

Page 10: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

�� ������������������

� ��������

Page 11: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

��������

������� �������������

���������������������

���������� ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ����������� ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ���

���������� ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ���

��������� ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ������������������������ ������������������������������������������������������������ ����������������������������������������������������������������������������� ������������������ ���������������������������������������������������������������������������� ���

������ ���� ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ��!�������� �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ��!"�#������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ ��!�������$%%������ ������������������������������������������������������������������������� ��$

��������������������������&�'����������� ������������������������������������������������������������������������ ���(����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ���

'��"������������� ������������������������������������������������������������������� ������"������������� ������������������������������������������������������������������� ���

�)(������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ ���)��� ����*��������������������������������������������������������������������������� ��$

���������+�"�),���������-��'*�.��/0����������������������������������� ��1*������*�����������-)(*�()2*('�(��*�,(�3��/0� ����������� ��4

�������������%%%������������� ������������������������������������������������ ���%

��������������������������5 ������������� ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ���"����� � ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ���"����&�������� ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ���

�����&����������������)��� ���� ����������������������������������������������� ���'�������&�����������"������������������������������������������������������������ ���'�������&��������)����������������')��������� ������������������ ���

'�����&�������� �������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ���'��������&�������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ���

������ ��

Page 12: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

��� �� ��������

'�����&������#� ��������������������������������������������������������������������� ���'�����&������)������������')������������������������������������ ���

(��&�������� �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ���(��&�������� ��&����������"���� ��������������������������������������������� ���(��&���������������)����������������')������������ ���������� ���6���������������)��������� �������������������������������������������������������� ��!

���������������������� ��������*(�������� ����� ������������������������������������������������������������������������������� !��*������� ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� !��*������5 �������������������������������������������������������������������������������� !�������"����������#� ������������������������������������������������������������������������� !���

��������!��"#��������������������&������ ������������������������������������������������������������������������� 7��5 ������������� �������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 7��

5���������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 7��5���������������� ���������������������������������������������������������������� 7������������ ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 7��

����&���������������������� ���������������������������������������������������� 7��������&����������������������')� ������������������������������������������� 7��'��8��� ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 7��9������������������&������������������ ����������������������������� 7������������ ��#������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 7�!���������������������� ���������������������������������������������������������� 7�!���/� ����:�#� ������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 7�!6� ����&�������������'2� ���������������������������������������������������������� 7�!,�8������������� ������������������������������������������������������������������� 7�79�� ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 7�7

6�� ������������ ������������������������������������������������������������������������� 7�7��&���2�;���������������<� ������������������������������������������������������������� 7�$6�� ������� ��#����=�� ������������������������������������������������������������������ 7�$,�&����������� ��#����;� �������������������������������������������������������������� 7�$"��������6�������������><� ������������������������������������������������������������ 7�$�����"��&�����2�������� ���������&���?� ���������������������������������� 7�1,�8��������' ���������@6�� ��������������������������������������������������� 7�46�� ����,�8���������2������&��� �������������������������������������������� 7�A

��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 7��������&����� ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 7���)��������&���)���������������������������������������������������������������������������� 7��!"���������&���"� �������������������������������������������������������������������������� 7��!������*�&�"������B� �������������������������������������������������������������������� 7��!

��� ������

Page 13: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

��� �� ��������

;�������������������)������;���������������������������������������������������� 7��!C��/���������D� ������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 7��7�������&����'���������������������&���6� ������������������������������ 7��76�����&����������������E� ������������������������������������������������ 7��7;��������7���������������������F����������������������������������������������� 7��7�����&����������)��� ����,�8��������� ���������������������������������� 7��$'�������,�8���*����������@' � �������������������������������������������� 7��$<����������� ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 7��$�������&������<������������� ����������������������������������������������������� 7��$

'�����&�'����������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 7��$�����'����� ��������������������������������������������������������������������������� 7��1')��������'������'� ������������������������������������������������������������ 7��1'�����������%���������������������������������������������������������������������������� 7��1�������������@������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 7��1��������G��6�&����@�6� ��������������������������������������������������������������� 7��4

)������������������������ ��������������������������������������������������������� 7��A����������������������H�� ������������������������������������������������������������� 7��A���������6���#���H���������������������������������������������������������������������� 7��%�����)�������6���#���H�� ���������������������������������������������������������� 7��%�������"����6�&����������-"����0���>6� ��������������������������������������� 7���6�I�����������2����������������H6� ����������������������������������������� 7����)(���������������8��/�6����-"����0���@��� ���������������������������� 7���

9�������������� �������������������������������������������������������������������������� 7������&�&���������������������������������JJJ� ���������������� 7���*���������������(������(�������������������������������������������������������������� 7���5��������������(�������� ����������������������������������������������������������� 7���C�&�&� ���CB�C����������������������������������������������������������������������� 7�������������������C�B�C��������������������������������������������������������������� 7���("65������/����������������������������������������������������������������������������� 7��!� ��/���<�����*� ����������������������������������������������������������������������� 7��!� ��/�������������� �������������������������������������������������������������������� 7��!6����5������5� ������������������������������������������������������������������������ 7��7*�&�� ���������������K� ��������������������������������������������������������� 7��7<����8���9����)������H9����������������������������������������������������������� 7��7'�#�������2��#�����������������������H�� ������������������ 7��7��/��2�����/������"����6�������H"��������������������������������������������� 7��$�#�������)�����������/���������H?� ��������������������������������� 7��1<��!�6�������������)������������@)C� ���������������������������������������� 7��1<��!�'�#������������6�������@'�� ����������������������������������������������� 7��1���������@��� ������������������������������������������������������������������������ 7��1���������(�� ������L���������������������������������������������������������� 7��4��������(�� ������L*���������������������������������������������������������� 7��A'���6��������L(������������������������������������������������������������������������� 7��%'��������6����'�� �������L6� �������������������������������������������������� 7��%

������ ����

Page 14: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

��� �� ��������

�����6����'�� ������@66� ������������������������������������������������������ 7���"������6�G�����*�G���L<� �������������������������������������������������������� 7���5����=��/�6�����������MC� ����������������������������������������������������� 7���"�������������,�8�����M<� �������������������������������������������������������� 7���)��/�2��������@�'�������������������������������������������������������������������������� 7���<���������)������@�)� ������������������������������������������������������������������� 7��������&��������@��� ��������������������������������������������������������������������� 7���*��������������������@*�� ��������������������������������������������������� 7�������8���')��������������@,)�������������������������������������������������� 7��������*���)�������*�G�����@)��� ����������������������������������������������� 7���

"��G����*���5 ������� ��������������������������������������������������������������������� 7���!�;����5 ������� ������������������������������������������������������������������������� 7�����;����5 ������� ������������������������������������������������������������������������� 7��!��������/ � ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 7��7�����2�*������*�����H*���������������������������������������������������������������� 7��$��������/ �@���� ����������������������������������������������������������������������� 7��$6�������*������*����������������/ �����@*�� ����������������������� 7��$�������������/ ���@*�� ��������������������������������������������������������� 7��$'�����2�5��&�����@56��������������������������������������������������������������� 7��$*������*���)�������*�G�����@)*� �������������������������������������������� 7��$

����&�������������� ���������������������������������������������������������������� 7��1����&������"�������� ���������������������������������������������������������������������� 7��1

'���G��"�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 7��1�������"�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 7��1������#�"������� ����������������������������������������������������������������������������� 7��1�����&�������&��������H; ����������������������������������������������������� �7��4"���� �5 ����������HK������������������������������������������������������������� 7��4*����������#�5 �������H���������������������������������������������������������� 7��A6�������������������&��������N������������������������������������������������� 7��A<��������&������"�������26����G�����&���5 �����H<��������� 7�!%�����&���)��� �����������*�����HN�OB�@�,�BB�@,������ 7�!%6�����&�2�6������&�5 �������@65�������������������������������������������� 7�!��������������"����������L"�B�MK������������������������������������������� �7�!�

6����������&������ ���������������������������������������������������������������������� 7�!�6����������&������������#� ��������������������������������������������������� 7�!�6������������#���������L"O� ����������������������������������������������������� 7�!�(����&�6����������&����������L)OB�H)������������������������������� 7�!�(�8��&2����8��&�6����������&��������@6'������������������������ 7�!�6����������&�������)(�� ������@6�� ����������������������������������� 7�!!6����������&���������������@6��������������������������������������������� 7�!!6����������&��������G�&������������&�5 �������@6=� ������ 7�!7

��� ������

Page 15: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

��� �� ��������

��������$�������������))�<�!��8���(������������"�������� ��������������������������������������������� $��6����8�������� ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ $��'���6����8�������� ��������������������������������������������������������������������������� $���������� ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������� $���������� ������� ������������������������������������������������������������������������������ $��,����������� ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� $����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� �$�������������� �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� $��"��������������� ��������������������������������������������������������������������������� �$��

�������������������#�L�� �������������������������������������������������������� $�!�������"����-�)(0��������� ����>3� ��������������������������������������������� $�7<�!��5 ���������������"������>�� ����������������������������������������������� $�75 �����&��������>,����������������������������������������������������������������������� $�$'���6����8�������8��/�������������L'��������������������������������������� $�$�������"������������������>=���������������������������������������������������������� $�1?5,2?5���"����)���&����>?� ����������������������������������������������������� $�4�����*�/�������������>9������������������������������������������������������������� $�4����/��������>:� ������������������������������������������������������������������������� $�A�����G��#�)�����>)������������������������������������������������������������������������ $��%�������6����8�������/���P����>'���������������������������������������������� $���)�����������/�2���������/�*�&���>�� ���������������������������������������� $�������'���6����8���������>�� �������������������������������������������������������� $���<�!�8����������� ���������L�� ������������������������������������������������� $���

��������%��#����&���� ��������)��������&������ ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 1��)�������&���)������"��&�������H)���������������������������������������������������� 1��)����&�����*������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 1��

*�����'���&�*�� 8��/���H)�������������������������������������������������������� 1��*�����'���&�*�� 8��/�����������)�����H)4� ������������������������������� 1�!

)����&�����6������������ ��������������������������������������������������������������� 1�7*�������&�����*�� 8��/���H)�� ������������������������������������������������������ 1�79���2��#�6�*�6�I������H)!B�H)7� ����������������������������������������� 1�$6��������&�����*�� 8��/���H)$� ��������������������������������������������������� 1�$6��������&�����*�� 8��/�����������)������H)1����������������������������� 1�1)����"��������L)� ��������������������������������������������������������������������������� 1�1������������&�����)����(�8���2�����8�����@�9� ������������������������������� 1�1�)(�����������6��������&�����*�� 8��/�-"����0���@6�� ���������� 1�4�)(�����������*�����'���&�*�� 8��/�-"���40�@*'��������������� �1�4

������ ��

Page 16: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

��� �� ��������

��������'�������� '������8��/�������#� ������������������������������������������������������������������������ 4��*���������#�5 ������� ��������������������������������������������������������������������� 4��

5 �����&��������*���������#� ��������������������������������������������������� 4��5 �����&������*���������#� �������������������������������������������������������� 4��6������5 ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 4��*�����5 ������� ����������������������������������������������������������������������������� 4��"��������� �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 4��*���������������������#� ����������������������������������������������������������� 4��6�������������������#�5 �������������������������������������������������������� 4��

*���������#��������� ������������������������������������������������������������������� 4������"��������M�O�� ������������������������������������������������������������������������ 4�!���&�&���"����������M�O�B�#� ���������������������������������������������������� 4�!������&���"����������M�O�B��� ������������������������������������������������������� 4�!������#�6�������M�6� ��������������������������������������������������������������������� 4�!����8��&�������#�M�O�� ��������������������������������������������������������������� 4�!������#�������M�QB�M(Q� ��������������������������������������������������������������� 4�!(�8��&�������#�M(O������������������������������������������������������������������� 4�!

C�&��������#��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 4�!��� ���8����#� ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 4�!�� ����#� ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 4�!5 �����&��������C�&��������#���������������������������������������������������� 4�75 �����&������C�&��������#��������������������������������������������������������� 4�7

������#�*�G���� ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 4�7*�G����+�"��������5�#������������������������������������������������������������������ 4�7*�G����+�"�����������������8��/� �������������������������������������������������� 4�7*�G����+�"�����������������8��/����"��������6��(��# ����������� �4�7

� ������ �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 4�$"��������� �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 4�$�������"��������� ������������������������������������������������������������������������� 4�1

C�&��������#�������� ������������������������������������������������������������������ �4�1(�8��&�C�&��������#�M(CO ���������������������������������������������������� 4�1����8��&�C�&��������#�M�� ���������������������������������������������������������� 4�1�����&�"�����������M"O �M ����������������������������������������������������� 4�4����������#�*�G����M*O�� ����������������������������������������������������������� 4�4���� ��������8��/�,�8�����M�O�� ��������������������������������������������� 4�4(�����������������M;������������������������������������������������������������������ 4�A��� ��#�(����������������������M;Q� ���������������������������������������� 4�A��� ��#�2�6���������&���'������'���� ���������

M�B�M�B�M�@��������������������������������������������������������������������������� 4�A������#�6�����M�O �M �������������������������������������������������������������� 4��%6���G�&��� ����M6� ����������������������������������������������������������������� 4��%������#�������M(Q����������������������������������������������������������������������� 4��%��� ��#� ������������M�Q� ������������������������������������������������������������ 4��%

��� ������

Page 17: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

��� �� ��������

<����#� ���������������M�B�M��� ��������������������������������������������� 4���6�I����� ������"��G���&����M�O �� ����������������������������������������� 4���*�����*�&���������MO ����������������������������������������������������� 4���*�����*�&�������������MM� ������������������������������������������������������� 4���6������*�&��"����������MO ������������������������������������������������ 4���

��������(����)� ������������5 ������� ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� A���������������P���� �������������������������������������������������������������������������� �A�������������� ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� A��

����'������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� A������'����������5 ��������������������������������������������������������������������������� A��

�����������"�������������������������������������������������������������������������������� �A������������������ ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ A����������������� ������������������������������������������������������������������������������ A�!

����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� A�!'��������������'� ������������������������������������������������������������������� A�75�C��/���C� ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������� A�75���C��/���C���������������������������������������������������������������������������������� A�$������%�5 ���������J��*'��O%� �������������������������������������������������� A�$��������5 ���������J��*'��O�� �������������������������������������������������� A�$���G���������������������J��*'��Q� ������������������������������������������ A�$���G������������ �8����������J��*'��OQ� ������������������������������������� A�$)����������������J�)�O-)���0� ��������������������������������������������������� A�$6����G�����������J�6�O-)���0���������������������������������������������������� �A�1����)����������6����G�������� ������������������������������������������������� A�1����������)���������J�)�O-���0������������������������������������������������ A�4����������6����G����J�6�O-���0 ����������������������������������������������� �A�4C�*��)���������J�)CO-���0� ���������������������������������������������������� A�AC�*��6����G����J�6CO-���0������������������������������������������������������ A�A)����� ������6�&�����<�������J�)�OQB�J�6�OQ� ��������������������� A�A��������6������������J��(6656� ��������������������������������������������� A��%����'����������J�''O������������������������������������������������������������� A��%�)(�'��8�����������'����������@�6����������������������������������� A��%

����#������)������� ������������������������������������������������������������������������� A��%

���������*�������������������6�&������� ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� �%����6�&������5 ��������QB��QR� ������������������������������������������������������� �%��

���&�&�6�&������<������OGB��ORG� �������������������������������������� �%�����G��������������������S�OG����������������������������������������������� �%�!'�����������%���������������������������������������������������������������������������� �%�!

������ ����

Page 18: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

��� �� ��������

6�&���������� ��������������������������������������������������������������������������� �%�!(��� ����������������� ������������������������������������������������������������������ �%�7(�����*���������������������������������������������������������������������������� �%�7*���������������������!� ������������������������������������������������������������� �%�7���/� �����������������7� ������������������������������������������������������������ �%�7"����������������&����$������������������������������������������������������������� �%�7"��������6�&8��/���������������������2

;����������������)����1� ������������������������������������������������������ �%�7"��������G����������������4����������������������������������������������������� �%�$���������������)�������A��������������������������������������������������������������� �%�$*�������������������)���������%���������������������������������������������������� �%�$�)���)������������������������������������������������������������������������� �%�$(��� ����I����"���������������������������������������������������������������� �%�$��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� �%�1������ �����!���������������������������������������������������������������������������� �%�1��7������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ �%�1�#�����)�������$� ������������������������������������������������������������������������� �%�4��1������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ �%�4)����)����������4������������������������������������������������������������������������ �%�4��AB��%� ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� �%�4������ ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������� �%�A������ �������������������������������������������������������������������������������� �%��%������ �������������������������������������������������������������������������������� �%��%��!���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� �%��%�)6�������6���&�������7� ������������������������������������������������������ �%���6)�2�)������#������$���������������������������������������������������������������� �%��������� �������1������������������������������������������������������������������������ �%���*��/8��/�)����������4� �������������������������������������������������������������� �%��������� �������A������������������������������������������������������������������������ �%��������� �������%������������������������������������������������������������������������ �%���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� �%��������� �������������������������������������������������������������������������������� �%���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� �%��������� ��������!����������������������������������������������������������������������� �%����)6�2���������/ �,�8���������������7���������������������������������� �%�����$��!%� ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� �%���6����������&������(��� ���������������!�� ������������������������� �%���6����������&������9����)�������!������������������������������������ �%��!�!����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� �%��!?5,�����������������)(����!!� ����������������������������������������������� �%��!?5�������������������)(����!7����������������������������������������������� �%��!�!$�!4����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� �%��!?5,���������������)(����!A����������������������������������������������������� �%��!?5�����������������)(����7%� �������������������������������������������������� �%��!

����� ������

Page 19: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

��� �� ��������

�����*���)�������*�G������7�� ������������������������������������������������� �%��!*������*���)�������*�G������7����������������������������������������������� �%��7'��������6����'�� ����)������������7���������������������������������� �%��7���������������7!� �������������������������������������������������������������������� �%��$�77���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� �%��$<�!����� �����������������7$� ����������������������������������������������� �%��1������ ����71�������������������������������������������������������������������������� �%��1�����G��#�)������74� ������������������������������������������������������������������ �%��1����/���������7A� ��������������������������������������������������������������������� �%��4������ ����$%�������������������������������������������������������������������������� �%��A�)(�5 ������$�� ���������������������������������������������������������������������� �%��A�������������������#�����$�� ������������������������������������������������� �%��%�������)�����������/���P������$�� �������������������������������������� �%��%'���6����8�������8��/��������������$!� ������������������������������������ �%��%�$7�$$����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� �%��%*�/�� ��������������$1������������������������������������������������������������� �%����$4���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� �%�����(���� ������ �������$A� �������������������������������������������������� �%���5 �����&���������1%����������������������������������������������������������������� �%���5 �����&���������������1������������������������������������������������������� �%��������� ������1������������������������������������������������������������������������� �%��!"��������)���������1�� ������������������������������������������������������������ �%��!����8��/�����#����1!� ����������������������������������������������������������������� �%��!����8��/�6���#�����17������������������������������������������������������������������ �%��!����8��/�6���#�����#����1$� ������������������������������������������������������� �%��7*��/���)������������11� ����������������������������������������������������������� �%��7'������8��/�)��������14� ���������������������������������������������������������� �%��7����/�*�&������1A� �������������������������������������������������������������������� �%��7�������"��������)(�� ��������4%� ������������������������������������������������ �%��$��������(�� �������4�� ������������������������������������������������������ �%��1,�&�����������������4�� ������������������������������������������������������������ �%��1�4����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� �%��1������ ������4!������������������������������������������������������������������������ �%��4�47��41� ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� �%��4���������)# ���44� ���������������������������������������������������������������� �%��4�4A��A%� ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� �%��4����������������A�� ������������������������������������������������������������ �%��A�A�����A!� ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������� �%��A<��!������&���A7������������������������������������������������������������������������ �%��%<��!�'�#�������������&���A$��������������������������������������������������� �%��%������ ������A1������������������������������������������������������������������������ �%��%�A4����%%� ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������� �%��%

������ ���

Page 20: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

��� �� ��������

������������+��!�,���"�������'��������������������&�����"���������� ��������������������������������� �������������9�������� ������������������������������������������������������������������������� ����

�G�����6�� ����� ������������������������������������������������������������������������ ���������"���������� �������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ���!<��7�8��������������6�� ����� ������������������������������������������������� ���!

�������������6,����� ��������������������������������������������������������� ���7"��&����,�8����������"6,��E���� ���������������������������������� ���7�����������������"��&�����6�� ���� ������������������������������������������ ���$������������,�8����6���� ��������������������������������������������������������� ���$6�I����*��������������,�8����6*,������������������������������������������ ���1�����&���������&���������� ����������������������������������������������������� ���1�����������&������������ ������������������������������������������������������ ���46������*����,�8������66��������������������������������������������������������� ���4*�/�,�8���8#�'���������"6*��E8� �������������������������������������������� ���46�I����*�������*�/���,�8������6**� �������������������������������������� ���A6�I����*�������<������6*<������������������������������������������������������ ����%�5�(��5")�5,���5��',��"65����E##E%E%������������������ ����%��G�������������&��"6:� ������������������������������������������������������� �����6�������������#������&����"6"������������������������������������������������� �����6�I����*��������������5 �������6*5����E�##� ������������������������� �����

5 ����� ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ����!

������������&�����������9������ ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ��������6� �������� ���������������������������������������������������������������������������� ������������� ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ���������&�)��������� ���� ���������������������������������������������������������������� ����

"������)�"������������������P��� ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� '��(G������������������������������������������������������������������������������ '��"�����6�I����������������������������������������������������������������������������� '��)��� ����*��� ����������������������������������������������������������������������������� '����&������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ '�������������6����� ����������������������������������������������������������������������� '������6����� �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� '������������ ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������� '��������������� ���������������������������������������������������������������������������� '���������)�����������/����I��#� ���������������������������������������������� '��(�������)�����������/����I��#���������������������������������������������� '��)�������5� ��*�G��������������������������������������������������������������������� '��

�� ������

Page 21: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

��� �� ��������

5 ������� �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� '�����������������*�G��� ��������������������������������������������������������������������� '��)��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� '��)����&� ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ '��*���(I���P������������������������������������������������������������������������������� '��6)�2�)������#� ���������������������������������������������������������������������������� '��*�/�*�#���"��������� �������������������������������������������������������������������� '��

"������)�-��������.��/�0�������������'*�"��������� �������������������������������������������������������������������������� ���)(*�()2*('�(��*�,(�"���������������������������������������������������� ���

"������)����1���2���� ������3� ���5 ������������� ������������������������������������������������������������������� ���6���G�&�������G����������������������������������������������������������������������������� ���

9����5 ����3� ��� ����������������������������������������������������������������� ��!6� ����&�������G��� �������������������������������������������������������������������������� ��!

"������)�0�������������������������������������"�������� ������������������������������������������������������������������ ���

)��� ������������� ���������������������������������������������������������������������� �����������"��������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ���

���������)��� ����*�������/���������������������������������������������������� ���

"������)�3��������������)�����0�����9������ �����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������(��

������������������ �������������������������������������������������������������������(��7��������G��6�&�����������������������������������������������������������������(��7������������ ����������������������������������������������������������������������������(��7����������������<�������5�#���������� ������������������������������(��7������#������������������������������������������������������������������������������(��16����������&��������������� ���������������������������������������������(��A

������6�&������� ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������(���<��7�8���������������������������������������������������������������������������������(��!

<��7�6�� ���������&����������������������������������������������������������������(��$������#�5 ��������� ��������������������������������������������������������������������������(��4

������#�5 ��������S��������������������������������������������������������������������(��4������#�5 ��������S��������������������������������������������������������������������(��A������#�5 ��������S��-�#������������ 0�-')H��0� ������������(��%������#�5 ��������S�!������������������������������������������������������������������(���

������ ���

Page 22: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

��� �� ��������

������#�5 ��������S7�-'�#�������!������*������*��������<�!�8���"�������0�-')H�70� ��������������������������������������������(���

������#�5 ��������S�$�-'�#�������!������*������*����������<�!��8���"�������0�-')H�$0� ��������������������������������������(���

������#�5 ��������S�1�-�#��������������*������*���,������5��&����0�-')H�10����������������������������������������������������(��!

������#�5 ��������S�4�-�#��������������*������*���������'����0�-')H�40��������������������������������������������������������(��7

������#�5 ��������SA�-�#�������<��78���������0�-')H�A0� �(��$

"������)�����"���������3-�0�������������

"������)����",,��4������������"���� ��

"������)�1�������5������;����K��,���� ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������� C����� ��������������&� ��������������������������������������������������������������������� C��)��8��������&���������������������������������������������������������������������������������� C��

���4���������������

����)

���� ������

Page 23: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Chapter 1Introduction

The Modem 3600 provides synchronous, asynchronous, and fax capabilities for data communications or facsimile links between a local computer and a remote computer, fax, or data terminal equipment (DTE) located anywhere a standard or cellular telephone can reach. Data can be transmitted over standard dial-up lines, private leased telephone lines, or wireless communication.

The Modem 3600 communicates at standard data rates up to 33,600 bps with compatible modems connected to similarly equipped computers, computer services, and data bases. Advanced error control and data compression ensure data integrity and increase data throughput.

When used with a Class 1 Fax software package, the modem can exchange fax documents at data rates up to 14,400 bps with any Group 3 fax machine or PC with a fax modem.

A high-level security feature allows secure operation of the modem, both locally and remotely.

Shelf-Mount Units

This User’s Guide supports the desktop and shelf-mount versions of the Modem 3600. Operation and function are generally the same for both, but when there is a difference, the information primarily supports the desktop unit. Installation for each version is described in Chapter 2.

Modem 3600 1-1

Page 24: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Introduction

Features

The Modem 3600 is a flexible telecommunications tool that offers the following standard features.

Data Mode • Full-duplex operation on two-wire public connections or two-wire

or four-wire private telephone connections with two-wire public automatic or manual backup

• 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 7200, 9600, 12000, 14400, 16800, 19200, 21600, 24000, 26400, 28800, 31200, 33600 bps DCE data rates

• Compatible with these standards:CCITT V.34CCITT V.33CCITT V.32 bis CCITT V.32CCITT V.29CCITT V.27CCITT V.22 bisCCITT V.22CCITT V.21CCITT V.13Bell 212ABell 103

• Compatible with a variety of software packages • Synchronous operation at all DCE data rates except Bell 103 300

and V.23• Asynchronous operation at all DTE data rates up to 230.4 kbps• CCITT V.42 bis and MNP level 5 data compression • CCITT V.42 and MNP 4 error control protocol • LCD configuration and status for easy operation• Front panel lockout• Autodial and Autoanswer capability• Autobaud DTE rate and character format selection• AT command set• V.25 bis autodialer• Configuration memory• Phone number storage

1-2 Modem 3600

Page 25: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Introduction

• Caller ID• Distinctive ring• Multiple levels of security with auto callback and password

protection and up to 50 users• Automatic speed matching to originating modem • Remote configuration using command mode or LCD• Built-in standard diagnostics for testing phone line quality and

modems at each end • Flash upgrades

Fax Mode• Fax speeds to 14.4 kbps• HDLC framing to allow T.30 Error Correction Mode• Standard Class 1 interface conforms to EIA-578 • Group 3 compatibility: CCITT V.21 Channel 2, V.27 ter, V.29,

V.17• Autoanswer under software control • Automatic fax/data detection

Software

Software operates the features of the Modem 3600.

Communications Software You must have communications software to transfer data. After installing the modem, consult your communications software user's manual for information on the software, commands, and features.

Class 1 Fax Communications SoftwareFor sending faxes, a Class 1 fax software package is required.

Internet BrowserTo connect to the Internet, Internet browser software is required.

Modem 3600 1-3

Page 26: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Introduction

Description

FunctionalThe Modem 3600 processes serial asynchronous data from a DTE at all standard rates from 300 bps to 230.4 kbps*, and serial synchronous data at rates from 300 to 33.6 kbps. Transmission can be over either dial-up lines or either two- or four-wire leased lines. The maximum line speed is 33.6 kbps. Built-in test features can determine system performance and isolate faults in the data link. Operation and configuration are controlled by the front panel LCD, the AT command set, or the V.25 bis command set.

*The 230.4 kbps DTE speed is available, but the Modem 3600 will notautobaud to 230.4 kbps. With the modem set for 115.2 kbps, enterAT\J2 to enable the speed and enter AT\J3 to disable it.

PhysicalThe Modem 3600 has a 32 character LCD front panel with three pushbuttons for option selection (Figure 1-1).

Figure 1-1. Typical Front Panel

Modem 3600

1-4 Modem 3600

Page 27: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Introduction

The Modem 3600 rear panel has an EIA-232 DTE connector, an 8-pin TELSET/LEASED LINE jack, an 8-pin DIAL jack, the power switch, fuse, and cord (Figure 1-2).

Figure 1-2. Rear Panel (115 Vac Model)

TELSETLEASED LINE DIAL

Modem 3600 1-5

Page 28: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Introduction

Modem 3600 CardThe shelf-mount Modem 3600 unit (Figur e1-3) has edge connectors that insert into the shelf backplane. The shelf backplane performs the same functions as the standalone rear panel. Refer to the “Shelf-Mount MD1000C Installation” on page 10.

Figure 1-3. Card Version of the Modem 3600

1-6 Modem 3600

Page 29: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Chapter 2 Installation

This chapter provides information on mechanical and electrical installation of the modem.

Mounting Accessories

We have included both self-adhesive feet and an adhesive-backed hook and loop fastener. The feet are for use when the module will be resting on a surface; the hook and loop is useful when mounting the modem to a PC or monitor housing or other flat surface.

To install the feet, peel them from the paper backing and place one foot at each corner of the bottom of the module. To use the hook and loop fastener, peel the plastic backing from one side and stick to the bottom of the module; peel the backing from the remaining piece and press the module firmly to the mounting surface.Once installed using the hook and loop fastener, the module may be removed from the mounting surface by grasping the unit and pulling firmly away from the mounting surface. To re-mount, align the hook and loop halves and press firmly together.

Modem 3600 2-1

Page 30: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Installation

Electrical Installation

The rear panel (Figure 2-1) includes DTE cable and telephone line connectors.

Figure 2-1. Rear Panel Connections (115 Vac Model)

AC Power ConnectionPower is supplied through a 6-foot line cord with a grounded 3-wire plug.

DC Power Connection

CautionTo protect the DC-to-DC converter from damage, ensure the positive and negative leads are properly connected.

If the modem is equipped for 12-60 VDC power input, connect the power to the terminal block attached to the modem back panel. A chassis ground connection is also supplied on the terminal block.

If the modem is equipped for +/- 12/+5 VDC power input, connect the VDC power to the amp connector. A chassis ground connection is also supplied on the terminal block.

DTE Connection

The DTE connector is a 25-pin D-series type conforming to EIA-232 specifications. You must use a shielded DTE cable to comply with EMC requirements. Pin signals are shown in Figure 2-2 and are described in Table 2-1.

TELSETLEASED LINE DIAL

2-2 Modem 3600

Page 31: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Installation

Figure 2-2. Digital Interface Signals

Modem 3600 2-3

Page 32: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Installation

Table 2-1. Pin Signal Description s

PinEIA- 232D

CCITTV.24 Signal Description

1 101 Shield No connection

2 BA 103 Trans-mitted Data

Serial digital data (to be modulated) from a data terminal or other digital data source: Synchronous data must be accompanied by the modem transmit clock (pin 15) or by an external data rate clock (pin 24). Data transitions should occur on positive-going clock transitions; asynchronous data does not require a transmit clock.

3 BB 104 Received Data

Serial digital data output to the DTE interface: Sync data is accompanied by an internal data rate (receive) clock (pin 17) that has positive-going transitions on the data transition. Async data does not require a receive clock.

4 CA 105 Request to Send

A positive level to the modem when data transmission is desired

5 CB 106 Clear to Send

A positive level from the modem in response to Request to Send and when the modem is ready to transmit. *

6 CC 107 Data Set Ready

A positive level from the modem when power is on and ready to operate: In dial-up operation, the modem must be off hook to give a high DSR signal.*

** Modem options may force these signals on or cause them to be ignored.

*** Refer to Appendix C, Hardware Options.

*† This function can be disabled or its logic sense reversed by hardware straps.

2-4 Modem 3600

Page 33: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Installation

7 AB 102 Signal Ground

Signal or common signal and dc power ground. **

8 CF 109 Received LineSignal Detector

A positive level from the modem indicating the presence of a received signal (carrier detect). *

9 -- +12 Volts

+12 voltage reference

10 -- -12 Volts -12 voltage reference

11 -- Signal QualityIndicator

This circuit indicates probability of errors in the received data: a positive level indicates poor signal quality while a negative level indicates good signal quality. †

15 DB 114 Trans-mit Clock(DCE)

A transmit data rate clock output for use by an external data source: Positive clock transitions correspond to data transitions.

17 DD 115 Receive Clock

A receive data rate clock output for use by an external data sink: Positive clock transitions correspond to data transitions.

18 -- 141 Local Loop-back

A positive level causes the modem to enter the local analog loopback test mode.*

Table 2-1. Pin Signal Descriptions (Continued)

PinEIA- 232D

CCITTV.24 Signal Description

** Modem options may force these signals on or cause them to be ignored.

*** Refer to Appendix C, Hardware Options.

*† This function can be disabled or its logic sense reversed by hardware straps.

Modem 3600 2-5

Page 34: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Installation

Telephone Line Connection

The modem operates in these line-related modes: • Dial• Leased

20 CD 108.2 Data Termi-nal Ready

This circuit is positive when the DTE is ready to originate or answer a call in dial-up operation. DTR must always be active (high) in 2-wire private line operation. Cycling DTR causes retraining.*

21 -- 140 Remote DigitalLoop-back

A positive level causes a digital loopback test mode at the remote modem.*

22 CE 125 Ring Indicator

In direct dial operation this circuit is positive in response to an incoming ring signal.*

23 CH 111 Data Rate Select

Supplies a data rate control input to select primary or fallback data rate: Negative voltage selects primary data rate and positive voltage selects fallback data rate.*

24 DA 113 ExternalTrans-mit Clock

A serial data rate clock input from the data source. Positive clock transitions correspond to data transitions.

25 -- 142 Test Mode

Indicates the modem is in a test mode.

Table 2-1. Pin Signal Descriptions (Continued)

PinEIA- 232D

CCITTV.24 Signal Description

** Modem options may force these signals on or cause them to be ignored.

*** Refer to Appendix C, Hardware Options.

*† This function can be disabled or its logic sense reversed by hardware straps.

2-6 Modem 3600

Page 35: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Installation

Dial Mode: PSTN Connection (DIAL jack)The public switched telephone network (PSTN) is a two-wire dial network. Modems are registered with the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) for direct connection to the PSTN. The label on the chassis bottom gives the FCC registration number and other information required for network operation.

Direct connection to the PSTN is shown in Figure 2-3.

Figure 2-3. Dial-up Connection (115 Vac Model)

DTE

DIALTELSET

LEASED LINE

RJ11C jack installedby telephone company

Shielded DTE Cable

8-pinConnectors

DTE ConnectorScrews

Use 8-pin Modular (at modem end) to 6-pinModular (at RJ11 wall jack end) connector.

Cable suppliedwith telephone

EIA-23225-Pin Connector

to DTE

1. The TELSET jack is provided on the back of the modem for use with a standard rotary or tone dial telephone regardless of the telephone jack arrangement ordered from the telephone company.

2. This standard rotary or tone dial telephone set can be used for originating a call or for voice communication. For sites requiring only auto answer capability, a phone is not needed.

3. For connector pin-outs, refer to Appendix B.

Notes:

Modem 3600 2-7

Page 36: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Installation

Leased Line Connection (TELSET/LEASED LINE Jack)Private or leased lines use four-wire or two-wire lines. In this mode, the user configures the unit for four-wire or two-wire operation, depending on the private line service used.

The telephone company will install the leased line and wall jack at your site. The line connects to the modem at the 8-position TELSET/LEASED LINE jack.

Figure 2-4 shows a typical modem hookup for operation over private leased lines with dial backup.

2-8 Modem 3600

Page 37: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Installation

Figure 2-4. Leased Line Connection (115 Vac Model)

DTE

DIALTELSET

LEASED LINE

RJ11C

Leased LineJack

Telset LeasedLine Jack

Dial(May be used for

Dial Backup)

Use 8-pin Modular (at modem end) to 6-pinModular (at RJ11 wall jack end) connector.(Optional connection for dial backup use.)

Leased LineCable

EIA-23225-Pin Connector

to DTE

1. Set the transmit output level to 0dBm. 2. DTR, which is the signal on pin 20 of the DTE interface, must be active

or the option DTE IGNORED must be set for 2-wire OR 4-wire leased line operation. 3. The connection shown includes dial backup. Connect only the leased-line jack to the modem's Telset jack for regular Leased-line use. 4. For a 2-wire Leased-line connection, Pins 1 and 2 of the Leased-line connection are used for Tx and Rx data. For a 4-wire Leased-line connection, Pins 1 and 2 are used for Tx, and Pins 7 and 8 are used for Rx.

Notes:

5. For connector pin-outs, refer to Appendix B.

Modem 3600 2-9

Page 38: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Installation

Shelf-Mount MD1000C Installation

Go to Appendix C, Hardware Options to check the board options before installation.

Shelf-mount Modem 3600 cards should be installed or replaced by personnel familiar with shelf-mount installation. The unit has an edge connector that inserts into a receptacle located on the backplane and power bus.

NoteFigure 2-5 represents a typical dialup connection using one of the most common rack shelves. Connect cables as appropriate for any compatible shelf.

Figure 2-5. MD1000C Connections

RJ11C, RJ45S orRJ41S jack installedby telephone company

Shelf backplane(with RM16M V.3600 installed)

To DTE

RJ11C jack, installed

(with MD1000C installed)

2-10 Modem 3600

Page 39: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Chapter 3Getting Started

Option Selection

There are six ways to change or select options: • LCD - Using the front panel LCD and pushbuttons is simple,

straightforward, and requires the least amount of technical background. Chapter 4 explains LCD operation.

• AT Commands - The AT command set can be used to select modem options. Chapter 5 describes AT commands.

• Status Registers - A series of special ATS commands allows the operator to change the decimal or hexadecimal value of a memory byte to change one or more options in that byte. Chapter 10 describes S-registers.

• Single Bit Status Registers - A second series of special ATS commands allows the user to change single bits within a byte to change an option. Chapte r10 also explains single bit control.

• Software Program - A wide variety of software programs is available, or advanced computer users can write their own software programs to interact with the modem. This manual does not discuss software programs.

• V.25 bis Commands - An extended set of V.25 commands allows selection of modem options during synchronous operation. Refer to Chapter 11.

Power-Up

A power-up procedure is not required. Turn on the modem using the ON/OFF power switch on the rear panel. The modem is factory configured to operate in most public switched telephone applications. If you have stored a desired option set it will automatically be restored at power-up.

Modem 3600 3-1

Page 40: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Getting Started

Placing a Call

There are three methods for placing a call:

Dialing with a Standard Telephone 1) Lift the telephone receiver. Wait for the dial tone.2) Dial the number of the remote site.3) When the answer back tone is heard, immediately press the

TALK/DATA button and hang up the telephone. The modems go through a connection sequence and establish a data link. If a data link is not established, return to Step 1.

4) After the link is established, hang up the telephone.

Autodialing from Front Panel1) If the number to be dialed has not been stored, advance to Main

Menu #6, CHANGE PHONE NUMBER.2) Enter the number by using the NO pushbutton to scroll the menu

and YES to select.3) After the number is entered, press YES to store the number.4) Advance the LCD to Main Menu #2, DIAL STORED

NUMBER.5) Select the number to dial and press YES. The number is dialed,

and the modems follow the same process as two telephones.

Autodialing from a Terminal with the AT CommandsTo dial a number, for example 555-1212, type AT D 555-1212 and press Enter, or enter ATDSn where n equals one of the stored telephone number locations 1-9.

The modem dials the number--either pulse or tone, whichever is currently in effect--and takes the role of the originate modem.

Refer to the “Dial Commands” section on p age5-13 for additional dialing commands.

3-2 Modem 3600

Page 41: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Getting Started

Answering a Call

There are three ways to answer a call:

AutoansweringNormally the modem is configured to autoanswer on the first ring. If a telephone is plugged into the TELSET/LEASED LINE jack, it will also ring.

Answering ManuallyWhen detecting a ring, the modem LCD displays ringing status.

Press TALK/DATA to answer the call and place the modem in the data mode.

Answering from Terminal with AT Command SetThe modem displays the ring response.

To answer a call, type ATA. The modem sends an answer-back tone and attempts to connect to the remote modem.

Ending a Call

There are two ways to complete a call:

Ending a Call Using the Front Panel1) Press the TALK/DATA pushbutton. DO YOU WANT TO

DISCONNECT will be displayed. 2) Answer YES.

Ending a Call from a Terminal with the AT Command Set

1) Enter +++ and the modem will enter command mode.2) Enter ATH and the modem will terminate the call.

Modem 3600 3-3

Page 42: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Getting Started

Reasons for Call TerminationThe conditions described in Table 3-1 cause call termination.

Table 3-1. Reasons for Call Terminatio n

Condition Description

Abort Disconnect (No answer, busy sig-nal, no modem, etc.)

Default 30 sec; select 1 to 255 sec (S-register 7).

ATH Disconnect command.

Loss of Carrier Disconnect

Select 100 ms to 25.5 sec (S-register 10).

Receive Long Space Disconnect

Disabled or select 2 sec.

DTR Disconnect Disabled or select 10 ms to 2.55 sec (S-register 25).

Loss of Line Current

Cleardown A disconnect method used in V.32 and V.34 mode.

LCD Display When TALK/DATA is pressed, the LCD displays DO YOU WANT TO GO TO TALK? When YES is pressed modem hangs up, if no telephone is connected or if the connected telephone is not off hook. Pressing NO displays DO YOU WANT TO DISCONNECT? Press YES to disconnect.

Train Timeout Modem fails to establish communication with remote site. Default is 30 seconds (S-register 7).

Protocol Link Establishment Failure

Reliable mode only; failure to establish reliable link.

Inactivity Timeout Default is 0 or disabled; select for disabled or 1 to 255 minutes (S-register 8).

Protocol Retry Limit Exceeded

12 retransmissions of the frame.

3-4 Modem 3600

Page 43: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Getting Started

Minimum DCE Speed A connection occurred at a rate less than minimum.

Security Password Failure

Maximum password entry attempts exceeded.

Security Callback Security callback is enabled and a new remote connection is established. The modem disconnects and places a call to the programmed number.

Signal Quality Leased line operation with dial backup enabled; extended loss of carrier or 4 unsuccessful retrains in 3 minutes causes dial backup.

Test Mode entered Certain test modes require call termination.

Modem power is turned off.

Table 3-1. Reasons for Call Termination (Continued)

Condition Description

Modem 3600 3-5

Page 44: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •
Page 45: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Chapter 4Front Panel Operation

The liquid-crystal display (LCD) front panel provides easy real-time access to modem configuration and status. You can use the LCD at any time to modify modem options or to get information about modem operation and status. All of the major modem options can be controlled through the LCD interface without an external terminal or phone line connection. Operation of the LCD can be secured using a password protection feature. A remote modem can even be configured using the local LCD, through the use of the front panel remote configuration feature.

LED Descriptions

The Modem 3600 LED indicator functions are as follows:• TR (Terminal Ready). TR lights when the DTE asserts Data

Terminal Ready. This signal is input on pin 20 (CCITT V.24/108.2).• CS (Clear to Send). CS lights when the modem is ready to send data

to the DTE. This signal is output on pin 5 (CCITT V.24/106).• RS (Request to Send). RS lights when the DTE is ready to send data

to the modem. This signal is input on pin 4 (CCITT V.24/105).• CD (Carrier Detect). CD lights when the received audio carrier

signal is detected or, if enabled, when error control protocol negotiation is complete. This signal is output on pin 8 (CCITT V.24/109).

• RD (Received Data). RD lights for a data space condition at the receive data output, indicating receive data output activity. This signal is output on pin 3 (CCITT V.24/104).

• TD (Transmit Data) TD lights for a data space condition at the transmit data input, indicating transmit data input activity. This signal is input on pin 2 (CCITT V.24/103).

Modem 3600 4-1

Page 46: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Front Panel Operation

LCD Menus

The Modem 3600 has seven main LCD menus that support modem operations. Table 4-1 lists them, in the following sequence:

• MODEM STATUS• DIAL STORED NUMBER• DISPLAY STATUS• SELECT TEST• MODIFY CONFIGURATION• CHANGE PHONE NUMBERS• FRONT PANEL FEATURES

LCD Menu Operation

The LCD menu is shown in Tabl e4-1, as follows:• The first column lists the seven main menu categories. • The second column is the submenus, listing functions for each

category in the main menu. • The third column lists specific items for submenu functions. • The fourth column lists option choices or status for the specific

items in the third column. • The fifth and sixth columns in the table show associated AT

commands and S-registers as a cross reference.

Each column item has a corresponding header in the previous column. If an option setting is selected or if all settings have been scrolled through, the display returns to the header.

Because of the menu structure and option choices, not all main menus use all four columns in Tabl e4-1. However, option selection and sequence are the same.

While operating in the option menu, pressing NO scrolls vertically down the columns; pressing YES advances horizontally across the columns. However, responding to the LCD prompt is the best way to reach an option. If NO is pressed and held, the LCD scrolls through the menus. Press the TALK/DATA button to return to the previous menu.

4-2 Modem 3600

Page 47: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Front Panel Operation

Table 4-1. LCD Menu Option Selectio n

Main Menu LCD MessagesS-Reg

1 MODEM-STATUS

V.34 33600 IDLEShows the current modulation, bit rate, and modem status.

(Press NO to advance to MAIN 2)

S91S67

Main Menu Submenu Submenu Item Item Option AT Com.S-Reg

2 DIAL STORED-NUMBER?

DIAL #1-9 YES, NO DSn(n=1-9)

---

3 DISPLAY STATUS? (status only)

DTE SIGNALS

QM ON/OFFDSR ON/OFFOH ON/OFFRI ON/OFF

DISPLAY STATUS

--- ---

PROTOCOL* NONEMNP 2, 3, 4, 5LAPM

DISPLAYSTATUS

--- ---

COMPRES-SOR*

NONEMNP 5, V.42b

DISPLAYSTATUS

--- ---

CARRIER DESCRIP-TIONS*

RECEIVE LEVEL NEAR END ECHO LEVELFAR END ECHO LEVELFAR END ECHO DELAYFREQUENCY TRANSLATIONBAUD RATERX BIT RATETX BIT RATE

DISPLAYSTATUS

--- ---

LAST DIS-CONNECT REASON

DISPLAYSTATUS

I5

4 SELECTTEST?

(Offline test only)

LOCAL ANALOGLOOP

INITIATE, EXIT

&T1 S16

LOCAL ANALOGLOOP WITH TP

INITIATE, EXIT

&T8 S16

(Online test) LOCAL DIGITALLOOP †

INITIATE, EXIT

&T3 S16

* When modem is not online, the display flashes and shows the status from thelast connection. † Modem must be online with protocols disabled.

Modem 3600 4-3

Page 48: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Front Panel Operation

Main Menu Submenu Submenu ItemItemOption

AT Com.

S-Reg

4,

cont.

SELECTTEST?(continued)

(Online testcontinued)

REMOTE DIGITAL LOOP †

INITIATE, EXIT

&T6 S16

REMOTE DIGITAL LOOP WITH TP †

INITIATE, EXIT

&T7 S16

TEST PATTERN† INITIATE, EXIT

%T ---

5 MODIFYCONFIGU-RATION?

CHANGE MODEMOPTIONS?

CHANGE LEASED/ DIAL LINE?

CHANGEMODULATION?

2 WIRE/4 WIRE

&L1,&L

S27

AUTO-MODEV.21BELL 103B212AV.22 bisV.27 ter *V.29 *V.33 *V.32bisV.34

*MM*MM1*MM2*MM4*MM5*MM6*MM8*MM10*MM11*MM12

S88

CHANGE MAX DCE RATE?

33600312002880026400240002160019200 16800 6001440012000 720096009600U **480024001200300DTE SPEED

%B18%B17%B16%B15%B14%B13%B12%B11%B10%B9%B8%B7%B6%B5%B4%B3%B2%B1%B

S69

*Lease line only.** 9600U is only valid for V.32 bis modulation.† Modem must be online with protocols disabled.

Table 4-1. LCD Menu Option Selection (Continued)

4-4 Modem 3600

Page 49: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Front Panel Operation

Main Menu SubmenuSubmenuItem

ItemOption

AT Com.

S-Reg

5

cont.

MODIFYCONFIGU-RATION?(continued)

CHANGE MODEMOPTIONS?(continued)

CHANGE MIN DCE RATE?

33600312002880026400240002160019200 16800 6001440012000 720096009600U **480024001200300DTE SPEED

%L18%L17%L16%L15%L14%L13%L12%L11%L10%L9%L8%L7%L6%L5%L4%L3%L2%L1%L

S69

CHANGE V.34RATE THRESH-OLD?

LOW BERMED BERHIGH BER

*TH*TH1*TH2

---

V.34 ASYMRATES

ENABLEDISABLE

*AS1*AS

S96

NORMAL ORIGINATEFORCED ANSWER*

NORMAL ORIG.FORCED ANS.

*OR

*OR1

S14

V.22 GUARD TONE

DISABLE550 Hz1800 Hz

&G&G1&G2

S23

V.32 FAST TRAIN ENABLEDISABLE

*FT1*FT

S29

AUTO RETRAIN ENABLEDISABLE

%E1%E

S60

SQ AUTO RATE HIGH BERMED BERLOW BERDISABLED

%R3%R2%R1%R

S53

TRANSMIT CLOCKSELECT

INTERNALEXTERNALRECEIVE

&X&X1&X2

S27

*Lease line only.** 9600U is only valid for V.32 bis modulation.

Table 4-1. LCD Menu Option Selection (Continued)

Modem 3600 4-5

Page 50: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Front Panel Operation

Main Menu Submenu Submenu ItemItemOption

AT Com.

S- Reg

5

cont.

MODIFYCONFIGU-RATION?(continued)

CHANGE MODEMOPTIONS?(continued)

DIAL TRANSMITLEVEL

-9 dBm to-21 dBm

*TDn S51

RING FREQUENCY LIMIT

ENABLE

DISABLE

*RL1*RL

--

LEASE TRANS-MIT LEVEL*

0 to -21 dBm *TLn S52

LINE CURRENT DISCONNECT†

OFFSHORTLONG

*LC,*LC1,*LC2

S32

LONG SPACE DISCONNECT†

ENABLEDISABLE

Y1Y

S21

DIAL BACKUP* MANUALAUTO-MATIC

*DB*DB1

S32

LOOKBACK TIME*

0 DIS-ABLEDto 255 MINUTES

--- S28

CHANGEPROTOCOLOPTIONS?

LAPM PROTOCOL

ENABLE

DISABLE

\N4, \N5,\N6, \N7\N, \N1,\N2, \N3

S70

MNP PROTOCOL

ENABLE

DISABLE

\N2, \N3,\N6, \N7\N, \N1,\N4, \N5

S70

PROTOCOLFALLBACK

ENABLE

DISABLE

\N3, \N5,\N6, \N7\N, \N1,\N2, \N4

S70

DATA COMPRES-SION

DISABLENORMTXRX

%C%C1%C2%C3

S56

* Lease line only.† Dial line only.

Table 4-1. LCD Menu Option Selection (Continued)

4-6 Modem 3600

Page 51: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Front Panel Operation

Main Menu Submenu Submenu ItemItemOption

AT Com.

S-Reg

5

cont.

MODIFYCONFIGU-RATION?(continued)

CHANGEPROTOCOLOPTIONS?(continued)

DTE SPEED DTE=DCECONSTANTDTE

\J1\J

S70

DTE FLOW CONTROL

DISABLEXON/XOFFCTSRTS/CTS

\Q\Q1\Q2\Q3

S54

DCE FLOW CON-TROL

DISABLEXON/XOFFCTS

\Q4\Q5\Q6, \Q7

S54

XON/XOFF PASSTHROUGH

ENABLEDISABLE

\X1\X

S54

INACTIVITY TIMER

OFF, 15, 30, 45, 60, 75, 90 MIN

\TLn S58

BREAK OPTION

0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 \K, \K1,\K2, \K3, \K4, \K5

S59

V.42 FAST DETECT

ENABLEDISABLE

\M1\M

S70

CHANGE DTEOPTIONS?

DATAOPERATION

SYNC

ASYNC

&M1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6&M

S27

S30

DTE RATE (Async)

300, 600,1200, 2400, 4800, 7200, 9600, 12000, 14400, 16800, 19200, 21600, 24000, 26400, 28800,31200336003840057600, 115200

--- S80

CHAR SIZE (Async)

7 BIT8 BIT

--- S61

PARITY (Async) NO, EVEN, ODD

--- S61

Table 4-1. LCD Menu Option Selection (Continued)

Modem 3600 4-7

Page 52: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Front Panel Operation

Main Menu Submenu Submenu ItemItemOption

AT Com.

S-Reg

5

cont.

MODIFYCONFIGU-RATION?(continued)

CHANGE DTEOPTIONS?(continued)

DIAL METHOD ASYNC DTR,MANUAL,V.25 BISYNC,V.25 SDLCV.25 bis ASYNC

&M1,&M2&M3&M4

&M5&M6

S27S30

AT COMMAND SET

ENABLEDISABLE

*NT1*NT

S29

CHARACTER TYPE (V.25 only)

ASCII, EBCDIC

--- S30

SDLC DATA FORMAT

NRZ, NRZI --- S30

DTR STATE IGNORERECALL CMDDISCON-NECTRESET

&D&D1

&D2

&D3

S21

DSR STATE NORMALFORCED HIGHOFF 5 SEC ONDISCON-NECTFOLLOWSOH

&S1&S

&S2

&S3

S21

DCD STATE NORMALFORCED HIGHOFF 5 SEC ONDISCON-NECTFOLLOWS REMOTE RTS

&C1&C

&C2

&C3

S21

CTS STATE NORMALFORCED HIGHCTS FOLLOWSDCDCTS=RTS

&R&R1&R2

&R9

S21

S72

Table 4-1. LCD Menu Option Selection (Continued)

4-8 Modem 3600

Page 53: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Front Panel Operation

Main Menu Submenu Submenu ItemItemOption

AT Com.

S-Reg

5

cont.

MODIFYCONFIGU-RATION?(continued)

CHANGE DTEOPTIONS?(continued)

RTS/CTS DELAY 0 to 150 ms (10 ms)

--- S26

DTE COM-MANDEDFALLBACK

ENABLEDISABLE

*FB1*FB

S53

OPTIONS RES/ RETND AT DISC

RESTOREDRETAINED

*RO1*RO

S29

CHANGE TESTOPTIONS?

BILATERAL DIGITAL LOOP

ENABLEDISABLE

*DG1*DG

S34

DTE LOCAL TEST

ENABLEDISABLE

*LA1*LA

S34

DTE REMOTE TEST

ENABLEDISABLE

*RD1,*RD

S34

REMOTE COM-MANDED

ENABLEDISABLE

&T4&T5

S23

TEST TIMEOUT OFF, 60, 120, 180. 240 SEC

--- S18

CHANGE DIALOPTIONS?

DIAL TYPE PULSE, TONE

P, T S14

AUTODIAL # OFF, 1 - 9 *AUn(n=1-9)

---

DIAL TONE BLIND DIALWAIT FOR DIAL

TONE

X, X1, X3 X2, X4

S22

WAIT DELAY(Blind Dial)

1, 2, 3, 4, 8, 16, 32 SEC

--- S6

PAUSE DELAY 1, 2, 3, 4, 8, 16, 32 SEC

--- S8

CALL TIMEOUT 15, 30, 45, 60, 75, 90, 105, 120 SEC

--- S7

ANSWER RING #X

1, 2, 4, 8, 16 --- S0

AUTOCALL-BACK

ENABLE, DISABLE

--- S72

CHANGE SPEAKEROPERATION?

VOLUME CONTROL

LOW HIGH

L1, L2L3

S22

Table 4-1. LCD Menu Option Selection (Continued)

Modem 3600 4-9

Page 54: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Front Panel Operation

Main Menu Submenu Submenu ItemItemOption

AT Com.

S-Reg

5

cont.

MODIFYCONFIGU-RATION?(continued)

CHANGE SPEAKEROPERATION?(continued)

SPEAKER CONTROL

ON UNTIL CARRDETECTALWAYS ONOFF WHILEDIALINGALWAYS OFF

M1

M2

M3

M4

S22

LOAD/STOREOPTION SET?

LOAD FACTORYOPTION

NO, 1-9 &Fn(n=1-9)

---

LOAD USER OPTION SET

12

Z0Z1

---

STORE PRESENT OPTIONS

12

&W&W1

---

USER OPTION AT RESET

12

&Y&Y1

---

6 CHANGE PHONE NUMBERS?

PHONE NUMBER

ENTER NUMBER32 digits

&Zx=n (n=phone # and modi-fiers)*CNx,n

---

7 FRONT PANEL FEATURES?

CHANGE RMTPASSWORD?

ENTER PASSWORD

%P ---

ENTER REMOTECONFIGURA-TION

ENTERREM CFGPASSWORD

%T ---

EXIT REMOTECONFIGURA-TION

EXIT &T ---

CHANGE FRONTPANEL PASS-WORD

ENTERPASSWORD *

--- ---

ACTIVATESECURITY

--- ---

*Password of 0000 disables front panel security.

Table 4-1. LCD Menu Option Selection (Continued)

4-10 Modem 3600

Page 55: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Front Panel Operation

Front Panel Security

The Front Panel Security feature provides password protection for front panel menu access. The modem is shipped from the factory with this feature disabled.

The Front Panel Security password is a 4-digit string that can be set to any combination of digits from “0000” to “9999”. Selecting a password of “0000” disables Front Panel Security; any other password enables it.

IMPORTANT: Without your password, you cannot access front panel configuration. Keep your password in a safe place. If you forget your Front Panel Security password, contact Technical Support. Refer to “Calling Technical Support” section on page 12-2.

When this feature is enabled, it can be activated in these ways:• Explicitly, by a front panel screen under Main Menu #7• By the modem, when no front panel buttons have been pressed for

3 minutes

When Front Panel Security is activated, the front panel menu returns to Main Menu #1 and the front panel is secured.

In secured state, the Main Menu #1 screen continues to maintain modem status, but a password must be entered before other front panel screens may be accessed. Pressing any front panel button causes the modem to prompt for the front panel password. After the password has been entered, a message briefly displays the result of the password validation process and, depending on the result, Front Panel Security either becomes inactive or returns to its active state.

Modem 3600 4-11

Page 56: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Front Panel Operation

During password entry, the front panel buttons operate as follows:

• Pressing NO makes the character at the cursor change to the next valid password character.

• Pressing YES while the cursor is on any of the first three password characters makes the cursor advance to the next password character. When the cursor is on the last password character, pressing YES makes the modem accept the displayed password.

• Pressing TALK/DATA while the cursor is on the first password character aborts password entry. When the cursor is on any other character, this button makes the cursor move to the first character.

4-12 Modem 3600

Page 57: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Chapter 5AT Commands

This chapter describes commands used to select options and operate the modem. Some options depend on, or are restricted by, the mode of operation. Appendix E provides a quick reference list.

Command Categories

The modem offers these major categories of command statements:• Response (page 5-5)• Dial (page 5-13)• Answer (page 5-16)• Terminal Interface (page 5-19)• General (page 5-22)• Private Line (page 5-33)• Configuration (page 5-37)• Remote Configuration (page 5-41)

Other AT command groups are discussed in these chapters:• Protocol (Chapter 6)• Test (Chapter 7)• Security (Chapter 8)• Fax (Chapter 9)• S-registers (Chapter 10)

Operation Modes

In asynchronous operation, the modem functions in one of these modes:• Offline Command Mode• Online Command Mode• Data Mode

Modem 3600 5-1

Page 58: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

AT Commands

Offline Command ModeIn offline command mode (generally referred to as command mode), the modem communicates with the computer or terminal. Commands can be entered separately or in strings. There is no data communication link established in this mode.

Online Command ModeThis mode is entered from the data mode after the escape command has been entered. The escape command is performed by entering the escape character (+ is the default) three times. The data communication link remains established but data transmission is suspended. The modem then accepts commands as it does in offline command mode.

Data ModeThe modem goes to data mode (online) after it acknowledges the proper signal and successfully connects with a compatible modem. In data mode, the modem sends and receives data, but does not accept or execute command instructions.

Example: The modem is in the command state. The D command and phone number are used to dial a remote modem. The local modem waits to receive an answer back tone from the remote modem. When the local modem receives the carrier, it leaves the command state and goes online in the data mode. At this time, both modems are using the telephone line and a communication link is established.

Sending Commands to the Modem

When the computer, modem, and monitor are on, an instruction can be sent to the modem telling it what function or activity to perform. The instruction, called a command statement, command string, or command, is typed using the computer/terminal keyboard. The command statement temporarily resides in a section of memory called the command buffer.

Each command statement is made up of characters, numbers, and keyboard symbols such as the & and % signs. Commands must be written in a specific form so the modem recognizes and follows the instruction.

5-2 Modem 3600

Page 59: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

AT Commands

Creating a Command Statement ATTo create a command statement use the following steps:

1) Type AT. This is the Attention Code telling the unit a command statement follows.

2) Type the command. 3) Press the Enter key to send the command statement to the

modem.

An example of a command statement using the dial command (D) follows.

ATD554-1212

This statement can be read as “Attention: Dial 554-1212.”

Another AT command statement example is: ATZ

This statement can be read as “Attention: execute the Z command.”

After entering a command line the modem returns a response message indicating whether or not the command was accepted or giving the data requested by the command line.

To clear command statements from the buffer you can:• Turn the modem off,• Enter AT, or• Use the DTR reset feature (“Data Terminal Ready &D” section on

page 5-20).

AutobaudThe attention code (AT) is analyzed by the modem to determine the transmission speed, parity, and bits per character used by the DTE. This autobaud process is repeated each time the AT command prefix is sent.

Guidelines for Creating Command StatementsThe attention code (AT) may be upper or lower case but not a combination like aT.

• Press the Enter key to execute a command.• The command buffer can hold 80 characters.• Use the backspace or delete key to erase the last character.

Even though the initial AT code must be all upper or lower case, characters that follow can be any mix of upper and lower case.

Modem 3600 5-3

Page 60: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

AT Commands

Monitor DisplayAs commands are typed they appear on the monitor so the operator can verify the input. This is called local character echo. The echo may be turned on or off using AT commands. Refer to the “Local Character Echo E” section on page 5-22 for details.

Command Statement BufferThe modem temporarily stores up to 80 characters in the command buffer. If this limit is exceeded, the modem does not accept the command and sends an ERROR message. To correct this condition, retype the command using 80 characters or less.

The AT characters and punctuation used in telephone numbers do not take up space in the buffer. Blank characters used as spaces to help increase readability are not counted. For example, the modem reads the commands:

ATD (212) 554-1212

ATD2125551212

ATD 212 555 1212

as having 11 characters each. Commands can be typed in any of these forms.

Backspace KeyUse the backspace key to change the command statement or correct errors. The backspace key allows the cursor to be moved back to the character(s) in error. The command can then be retyped from that point.

Example: ATD5551211 has been typed. To change the last 1 to 2, press the backspace key once, type 2, and press Enter to execute the command.

Repeating a Command A/This command tells the computer to repeat the last command stored in its buffer. It automatically reexecutes the command without retyping. The return key does not need to be pressed.

Example: The ATD5551212 command has been executed, and the phone is busy. To repeat the instruction type A/. Do not use AT before this command: AT empties the buffer.

5-4 Modem 3600

Page 61: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

AT Commands

Numbered CommandsCommands that start with the same letter are distinguished by a number following the letter.

For example, the M0 command selects speaker always off, M1 speaker on until carrier detected, and M2 selects speaker always on.

NoteThe zero (0) may be omitted; the commands M and M0 are identical. This manual uses the nonzero form. The modem treats both the same, but zeros count against the buffer total.

Group CommandsA group of commands can be typed in a single command statement. Pressing the Enter key sends the entire command string to the modem, which executes each command individually in the order it appears in the command statement reading from left to right.

For example, the command statement ATQ0V0L3DT5551212 means• AT Attention.• Q Allow response messages to be sent.• V Select digit code responses.• L3 Select high volume.• DT Tone dial 555-1212.

The modem executes the AT command followed by the Q, V, L, D, and T commands. ATQ0V0L3DT5551212 can be read as ATQVL3DT5551212. Eliminating zeros reduces the number of characters, allowing more room in the buffer.

The dial D command initiates the dial process so no other commands, only dial modifiers, can follow it.

NoteBold text indicates command parameter defaults.

Response Commands

The modem communicates with the operator through response messages. These appear on the monitor or a computer printout to show the result of the command or action executed. Response messages can appear as words or numbers.

Modem 3600 5-5

Page 62: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

AT Commands

Digit / Word Selection VThe V command tells the modem which type of response message to show on the monitor. Some software requires digit response messages but words are easier to remember.

Response Displays Q The Q command enables or disables response messages. The modem still responds to commands when the response display is inhibited.

Negotiation Displays WThe W command enables or disables negotiation response messages. These messages are verbose negotiation status displays to alert the user to the link rate, protocol, and DTE rate.

Protocol Result Codes \VEnable or disable protocol result codes. Table 5-1 lists these codes.

Command Operation

V Enables digit response messages

V1 Enables word response messages

Command Operation

Q Response display on

Q1 Response display off

Q2 Response display on in originate mode only

Command Operation

W Disables negotiation displays

W1 Enables negotiation displays

W2 Displays DCE link rate only

Command Operation\V Disable protocol result codes

\V1 Enable protocol result codes

5-6 Modem 3600

Page 63: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

AT Commands

Call Progress / Connect Speed Messages XThe X command selects response code/message displays and dialing options such as call progress monitoring, busy signal or dial tone detection and blind dialing.

The X command followed by a dial command makes the modem go off hook, wait the amount of time set in register S6, and dial the number. If connection is made, the modem returns a CONNECT (code 1) message to the screen regardless of the connection rate. With a basic response, the modem does not detect a busy or no dial tone condition.

The X1 command followed by a dial command makes the modem go off hook, wait the amount of time set in register S6, and dial the number. If connection is made the modem returns an appropriate CONNECT message or code to the screen. The modem does not detect a busy or no dial tone situation.

The X2 command followed by a dial command makes the modem go off hook and wait for a dial tone before dialing. If a dial tone is not detected within 5 seconds, the modem sends a NO DIALTONE message and hangs up. The modem does not detect a busy situation in this mode.

Command Operation

X Dial tone and busy signal detection not selected; CONNECT (code 1) response messages displayed for all speeds

X1 Dial tone and busy signal detection not selected; appropriate CONNECT response messages or codes displayed for data rate

X2 Dial tone detection only; NO DIAL TONE message or code appears if dial tone not detected within 5 seconds

X3 Busy signal detection only; BUSY message or code appears if dialed number is busy

X4 Dial tone and busy signal detection; appropriate CONNECT message or code displayed

Modem 3600 5-7

Page 64: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

AT Commands

The X3 command followed by a dial command makes the modem go off hook, wait the amount of time set in register S6 and dial the number. If a busy signal is detected, the modem sends a BUSY message and hangs up. If the call is completed, the appropriate CONNECT message similar to X1 is displayed. The modem does not detect a no dial tone situation.

The X4 command followed by a dial command makes the modem go off hook and wait for a dial tone before dialing. If a dial tone is not detected within 5 seconds, the modem returns a NO DIALTONE message and hangs up. If a busy signal is detected, the modem returns a BUSY message and hangs up. If the call is completed, the appropriate CONNECT message similar to X1 is displayed.

The X4 command combines the features of X1, X2, and X3. The factory setting is X4.

NoteWhen an X2, X3, or X4 command is in effect, an appropriate CONNECT data rate message or code is displayed as for X1. When a blind dial command (X, X1, X3) is in effect, the modem waits 2 seconds or the time set in S6 and then dials.

Number Code Application *RCSome communications software packages use different number codes to indicate the data rate of the serial port. This option selects either of two commonly used number code sets.

NoteAsterisks in AT commands are part of the command and do not indicate footnotes.

Command Code Set Number Operation*RC Standard 15

184800 bps9600 bps

*RC1 Alternate 1112

4800 b p s9600 bps

5-8 Modem 3600

Page 65: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

AT Commands

Response Number Codes / MessagesResponse number codes, messages, and their meanings are listed in . The connect rates are serial port rates (DTE), not DCE rates.

Code Message Meaning

0 OK Command received

1 CONNECT Connect at 300 bps while X1, X2, X3, or X4 command in effect; all rates while X command in effect

2 RING Ring detected

3 NO CARRIER Valid carrier not detected within period specified by register S7, or carrier lost for value of S10 or more

4 ERROR Command not recognized or too long

5 CONNECT 1200 Connection made at 1200 bps

6 NO DIAL TONE No dial tone detected for 5 seconds (X2 or X4 command in effect)

7 BUSY Dialed number busy (X3 or X4 command in effect)

10 CONNECT 2400 DTE rate 2400 bps

11, 15 CONNECT 4800 DTE rate 4800 bps

12, 18 CONNECT 9600 DTE rate 9600 bps

20 CONNECT 300 DTE rate 300 bps

22 CONNECT 7200 DTE rate 7200 bps

23 CONNECT 12000 DTE rate 12000 bps

24 CONNECT 14400 DTE rate 14400 bps

25 CONNECT 16800 DTE rate 16800 bps

26 CONNECT 19200 DTE rate 19200 bps

27 CONNECT 21600 DTE rate 21600 bps

28 CONNECT 24000 DTE rate 24000 bps

29 CONNECT 26400 DTE rate 26400 bps

30 CONNECT 28800 DTE rate 28800 bps

Modem 3600 5-9

Page 66: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

AT Commands

31 CONNECT 31200 DTE rate 31200 bps

32 CONNECT 32000 DTE rate 32000 bps

33 CONNECT 33600 DTE rate 33600 bps

34 CONNECT 38400 DTE rate 38400 bps

35 CONNECT 57600 DTE rate 57600 bps

36 CONNECT 115200 DTE rate 115200 bps

37 CONNECT 230400 DTE rate 230400 bps

38 CONNECT 300/V42bis V.42 bis 300 bps connection

39 CONNECT 600/V42bis V.42 bis 600 bps connection

40 CONNECT 1200/V42bis V.42 bis 1200 bps connection

41 CONNECT 2400/V42bis V.42 bis 2400 bps connection

42 CONNECT 4800/V42bis V.42 bis 4800 bps connection

43 CONNECT 7200/V42bis V.42 bis 7200 bps connection

44 CONNECT 9600/V42bis V.42 bis 9600 bps connection

45 CONNECT 12000/V42bis

V.42 bis 12000 bps connection

46 CONNECT 14400/V42bis

V.42 bis 14400 bps connection

47 CONNECT 16800/V42bis

V.42 bis 16800 bps connection

48 CONNECT 19200/V42bis

V.42 bis 19200 bps connection

49 CONNECT 21600/V42bis

V.42 bis 21600 bps connection

50 CONNECT 24000/V42bis

V.42 bis 24000 bps connection

51 CONNECT 26400/V42bis

V.42 bis 26400 bps connection

52 CONNECT 28800/V42bis

V.42 bis 28800 bps connection

53 CONNECT 31200/V42bis

V.42 bis 31200 bps connection

Code Message Meaning

5-10 Modem 3600

Page 67: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

AT Commands

54 CONNECT 32000/V42bis

V.42 bis 32000 bps connection

55 CONNECT 33600/V42bis

V.42 bis 33600 bps connection

56 CONNECT 38400/V42bis

V.42 bis 38400 bps connection

57 CONNECT 57600/V42bis

V.42 bis 57600 bps connection

58 CONNECT 115200/V42bis

V.42 bis 115200 bps connection

59 CONNECT 230400/V42bis

V.42 bis 230400 bps connection

60 CONNECT 300/V42 V.42 300 bps connection

61 CONNECT 600/V42 V.42 600 bps connection

62 CONNECT 1200/V42 V.42 1200 bps connection

63 CONNECT 2400/V42 V.42 2400 bps connection

64 CONNECT 4800/V42 V.42 4800 bps connection

65 CONNECT 7200/V42 V.42 7200 bps connection

66 CONNECT 9600/V42 V.42 9600 bps connection

67 CONNECT 12000/V42 V.42 12000 bps connection

68 CONNECT 14400/V42 V.42 14400 bps connection

69 CONNECT 16800/V42 V.42 16800 bps connection

70 CONNECT 19200/V42 V.42 19200 bps connection

71 CONNECT 21600/V42 V.42 21600 bps connection

72 CONNECT 24000/V42 V.42 24000 bps connection

73 CONNECT 26400/V42 V.42 26400 bps connection

74 CONNECT 28800/V42 V.42 28800 bps connection

75 CONNECT 31200/V42 V.42 31200 bps connection

76 CONNECT 32000/V42 V.42 32000 bps connection

77 CONNECT 33600/V42 V.42 33600 bps connection

78 CONNECT 38400/V42 V.42 38400 bps connection

79 CONNECT 57600/V42 V.42 57600 bps connection

Code Message Meaning

Modem 3600 5-11

Page 68: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

AT Commands

80 CONNECT 115200/V42 V.42 115200 bps connection

81 CONNECT 230400/V42 V.42 230400 bps connection

82 CONNECT 300/MNP5 MNP5 300 bps connection

83 CONNECT 600/MNP5 MNP5 600 bps connection

84 CONNECT 1200/MNP5 MNP5 1200 bps connection

85 CONNECT 2400/MNP5 MNP5 2400 bps connection

86 CONNECT 4800/MNP5 MNP5 4800 bps connection

87 CONNECT 7200/MNP5 MNP5 7200 bps connection

88 CONNECT 9600/MNP5 MNP5 9600 bps connection

89 CONNECT 12000/MNP5 MNP5 12000 bps connection

90 CONNECT 14400/MNP5 MNP5 14400 bps connection

91 CONNECT 16800/MNP5 MNP5 16800 bps connection

92 CONNECT 19200/MNP5 MNP5 19200 bps connection

93 CONNECT 21600/MNP5 MNP5 21600 bps connection

94 CONNECT 24000/MNP5 MNP5 24000 bps connection

95 CONNECT 26400/MNP5 MNP5 26400 bps connection

96 CONNECT 28800/MNP5 MNP5 28800 bps connection

97 CONNECT 31200/MNP5 MNP5 31200 bps connection

98 CONNECT 32000/MNP5 MNP5 32000 bps connection

99 CONNECT 33600/MNP5 MNP5 33600 bps connection

100 CONNECT 38400/MNP5 MNP5 38400 bps connection

101 CONNECT 57600/MNP5 MNP5 57600 bps connection

102 CONNECT 115200/MNP5

MNP5 115200 bps connection

103 CONNECT 230400/MNP5

MNP5 230400 bps connection

104 CONNECT 300/MNP MNP 300 bps connection

105 CONNECT 600/MNP MNP 600 bps connection

106 CONNECT 1200/MNP MNP 12000 bps connection

107 CONNECT 2400/MNP MNP 24000 bps connection

108 CONNECT 4800/MNP MNP 4800 bps connection

109 CONNECT 7200/MNP MNP 7200 bps connection

Code Message Meaning

5-12 Modem 3600

Page 69: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

AT Commands

Dial Commands

Dial commands let the modem originate a call to another modem. These commands can be used with either tone or pulse dial telephone systems.

Dialing DTo dial a number, for example 555-1212, insert the D command in the dialing sequence.

AT D 555-1212

The modem dials the number, either pulse or tone, whichever is in effect, and takes the role of the originate modem.

Use spaces, hyphens, parentheses, or other punctuation, except dial modifiers, to make the command line easier to read and enter. For example, these are all treated the same:

AT D 1-800-555-1212

AT D 1 (800) 555-1212

ATD18005551212

110 CONNECT 9600/MNP MNP 9600 bps connection

111 CONNECT 12000/MNP MNP 12000 bps connection

112 CONNECT 14400/MNP MNP 14400 bps connection

113 CONNECT 16800/MNP MNP 16800 bps connection

114 CONNECT 19200/MNP MNP 19200 bps connection

115 CONNECT 21600/MNP MNP 21600 bps connection

116 CONNECT 24000/MNP MNP 24000 bps connection

117 CONNECT 26400/MNP MNP 26400 bps connection

118 CONNECT 28800/MNP MNP 28800 bps connection

119 CONNECT 31200/MNP MNP 31200 bps connection

120 CONNECT 32000/MNP MNP 32000 bps connection

121 CONNECT 33600/MNP MNP 33600 bps connection

122 CONNECT 38400/MNP MNP 38400 bps connection

123 CONNECT 57600/MNP MNP 57600 bps connection

124 CONNECT 115200/MNP MNP 115200 bps connection

125 CONNECT 230400/MNP MNP 230400 bps connection

Code Message Meaning

Modem 3600 5-13

Page 70: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

AT Commands

Dial modifiers are as follows.

Tone Dialing TTo tone dial a number sequence, insert a T in the dial sequence.

AT D T 323-1111

In this example, the modem tone dials the telephone number. The dialing method selected remains in effect until changed.

Pulse Dialing PTo pulse dial a number sequence, insert a P in the dial sequence.

AT D P 554-9902

Insert Long Pause ,To insert a long pause in the dialing sequence, use a comma. This inserts a 2 second delay (or the value in register S8).

AT D P 9, 1-800-554-1000

Here the modem pulse dials a 9, pauses for the telephone system to switch to an outside line, then dials the phone number. Comma pauses may be inserted consecutively if desired.

Wait for Second Dial Tone WTo wait for second dial tone insert a W in the dialing sequence.

AT D 9 W 323-8000

Instead of using a comma pause for an outside line, wait up to 30 seconds (time specified by S7) for a second dial tone.

Command Operation

T Tone dialing

P Pulse dialing

, Insert a long pause (2 sec or value in S8)

W Wait for 2nd dial tone

! Flash (1/2 sec)

R Switch to answer mode after dialing

; Return to command mode after dialing

@ Wait for silence

S Dial stored command line or number

5-14 Modem 3600

Page 71: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

AT Commands

Hook Flash !To flash the switchboard, insert an exclamation mark in the dialing sequence.

AT D T 9W 323-8000 ,!, #7 377

This inserts a 0.5 second on hook condition, usually for transferring a call or similar use.

In this example, the modem tone dials a 9, waits for the second dial tone, dials the phone number, pauses, flashes to start the transfer, pauses a second time, then uses #7 to transfer the call to extension 377.

Switching to Answer Mode after Dialing RTo switch to answer mode after dialing, use an R at the end of the dial sequence.

AT D 554-2345 R

Use this command suffix to call an originate-only modem.

Remaining in Command Mode ;To remain in command mode after dialing, place a semicolon at the end of the dial sequence.

AT D 234-5678;

The modem will dial the telephone number entered but will not attempt to train when the remote service answers the call.

This is used to retain control so that further dialing tones may be entered with the following:

AT DTn;

where n= additional tones to be sent.

Wait for 5 Seconds of Silence @To wait for 5 seconds of silence (no answer back tone) after accessing an electronic service, use the @ command in the dialing sequence.

AT D 399-4700 @ 2251 ;

In this example the modem dials the number and, after the connection, waits for 5 consecutive seconds of silence. The modem then sends service code 2251 and returns to command mode for further input.

Modem 3600 5-15

Page 72: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

AT Commands

For example, you might enter a dollar amount for a banking transaction by entering

AT D 1400 ;

This sends the sequence 1400 and then returns to the command mode for further entries, according to the requirements of the banking service.

Dialing a Stored Telephone Number SnTo dial one of the previously stored numbers, enter Sn where n represents a stored telephone number location between 1 and 9.

AT D S9

In this example, the number stored in location 9 is dialed.

NoteDS and DS1 are the same location.

Autodial Number Location *AUnThe *AUn command selects stored number n (n=1 to 9) to be autodialed. This is the autodial number, which is used for any autodial application.

Voice CallsTo make a voice call, dial the number with the telephone. To use the dial command for the call, enter the following dialing sequence:

AT D (number);

The ; modifier recalls the command mode and prevents the modem from training. The remote site must be answered by the telephone for the voice call to be successful.

Switching from Voice to DataAfter dialing, place the modems at both ends in data mode by pressing the TALK/DATA button. The *DA1 command can also be used to change from talk mode to data mode.

Answering A Call

There are three ways to answer a call for a data connection:• Manually• AT Command• Autoanswer

5-16 Modem 3600

Page 73: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

AT Commands

Manual AnswerWhen the phone rings, answer by pressing the TALK/DATA button.

AT Command Answer AThe modem can be made to answer a call by entering ATA when the phone rings.

Autoanswer S0Autoanswer is controlled by register S0. S0 determines which ring the modem answers on. S0 can be loaded with a value between 1 and 255 for autoanswer. Entering ATS0=0 disables autoanswer. Decide which ring the modem is to answer on and set S0 to that decimal value.When S0 is one or greater, the modem automatically answers on the selected ring and connects with the calling modem.

NoteIf the modem is set to respond to DTR the DTR signal must be on for autoanswer to work.

Caller ID *IDIf the telephone company is providing Caller ID services to the local phone line, the Modem 3600 can report Caller ID to the DTE. *

NoteThe communications software package may need reconfiguring to look for the “Caller Number:” message prefix so that it knows when to look for a phone number.

Command Operation

*ID Disable Caller ID

*ID1 Enable Caller ID

Modem 3600 5-17

Page 74: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

AT Commands

When Caller ID is enabled, one of the messages in Table 5-2 appears on the computer screen after the first RING message:

If the telephone company provides Enhanced Caller ID, the caller's name appears after the caller phone number.

Distinctive Ring *DRIf the telephone company is providing distinctive ring service to the local phone line, the Modem 3600 can report the type of ring to the DTE.* The data communications software package must allow distinctive ring.

*Caller ID and Distinctive Ring are compatible only with USAstandards.

Table 5-2. Caller ID Message s

The modem sends this message... If:

CALLER<sp>NUMBER:(505)555-1313

The number was delivered by the phone company

CALLER<sp>NUMBER:OUT<sp> OF <sp>AREA

The number was not available from the phone company

CALLER<sp>NUMBER:PRIVATE Delivery was blocked by the caller

CALL FAILURE<sp>NUMBER: ERROR

The number was received in error

Command Operation

*DR=0 Disable Distinctive Ring

*DR=1 Enable Distinctive Ring

5-18 Modem 3600

Page 75: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

AT Commands

When distinctive ring is enabled, one of the messages in Table 5-3 appears on the DTE instead of the regular RING message:

Terminal Interface Commands

The EIA-232 interface connects the modem and DTE. Terminal interface commands control the action of the modem and the terminal in response to the signals being exchanged on the interface pins. Refer to Table 2-1.

Data Carrier Detect &CWhen using DCD to indicate a valid carrier, use the &C1 command. Some terminals and other devices require DCD on in order to communicate with the modem; if so, use the &C command.

NoteAT&C3 is used to simulate switched carrier operation.

NoteFor simulated switched carrier operation &C3 must be selected on both modems. Not available in the B103 and V.21 modulation modes.

Table 5-3. Distinctive Ring Message s

The modem sends this message... If the Ring Was a:

RING A Single ring (1 ring burst)

RING B Double ring (2 ring bursts)

RING C Triple ring (3 ring bursts)

Command Operation&C DCD always on

&C1 DCD on when modem recognizes remote modem carrier or, if enabled, when protocol negotiation is complete.

&C2 DCD on except for 5 seconds after disconnect

&C3 DCD follows RTS on remote modem (simulated switched carrier V.13).

Modem 3600 5-19

Page 76: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

AT Commands

Data Set Ready &SThese commands control the DSR signal generated by the modem to indicate that the modem is ready for operation. DSR must be on for some terminals and devices to communicate with the modem.

Data Terminal Ready &DIn data mode DTR may be used for modem control.

NoteIf DTR controls dialer is selected, selecting DTR active will cause an autodial after an off-to-on transition of DTR.

Command Operation

&S DSR always on

&S1 DSR on when off hook in data mode

&S2 DSR off for 5 seconds after disconnect then returns to on

&S3 DSR follows off hook (OH) signal

Command Operation

&D The modem ignores DTR.

&D1 The modem goes to command mode from data mode when DTR goes from on to off.

&D2 Disconnects when DTR goes from on to off; disables autoanswer while DTR is off.

&D3 Disconnects, recalls command mode, and resets the modem to a stored configuration when DTR goes from on to off.In dial line mode the modem disconnects; in leased line, the modem retrains.

5-20 Modem 3600

Page 77: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

AT Commands

Serial Port Ring Indicator (Pin 22) \RThe \R commands determine how the ring indicate signal operates on pin 22 of the EIA-232 DTE connector.

Request to Send / Clear to Send &RWhen the modem is operating in nonbuffered mode (direct mode) or in synchronous mode, &R enables the RTS-to-CTS delay determined by the value in S26. &R1 forces CTS high and the modem ignores RTS (default). With &R2 selected, CTS goes high when carrier is detected. &R9 forces CTS to follow the state of RTS without delay.

NoteRTS/CTS delay is not valid in buffered mode or with error control enabled.

NoteWith &R2 selected, XON/XOFF is the only valid method of flow control and &C and &C1 are the only valid carrier detect options.

Command Operation

\R Causes ring indicate signal on pin 22 to turn on (high) during each ring and remain on during the call

\R1 Causes ring indicate signal on pin 22 to turn on (high) during each ring and turn off (low) when the call is answered

Command Operation

&R Enables RTS-to-CTS delay

&R1 CTS forced on

&R2 CTS follows DCD

&R9 CTS equals RTS

Modem 3600 5-21

Page 78: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

AT Commands

DTE Controlled Fallback Rate (Pin 23) *FBPin 23 of the EIA-232 DTE connector provides signal input to the modem for DTE fallback. If the modem is not using DTE fallback, set this option to ignore pin 23. To cause the modem to act on high/low levels of pin 23, enable this option. Negative level forces a higher rate for primary data rate; positive forces a lower rate providing a fallback rate.

General Commands

This series of commands controls various standard options that in most cases apply to any mode of operation.

Changing from Data Mode to Command Mode +++To exit data mode and go to online command mode, press the escape character three times (+ is the default). Pause for the length of time set by register S12 (1 second is the default) before and after the +++ to ensure the modem recognizes the escape command.

This sequence temporarily suspends data mode transmissions and allows command mode operations without breaking or otherwise disturbing the telephone line connection. The modem responds with OK when it detects the escape code. Return to data mode by entering the O command.

NoteThe AT command set must be enabled.

Local Character Echo EType AT without a carriage return. If the screen shows AT character, echo is correct. Proceed with other commands as desired.

If the screen shows AATT, enter the E command to correct the double characters or disable character echo by the modem.

Command Operation*FB Ignore pin 23

*FB1 Transition on pin 23 changes speed

5-22 Modem 3600

Page 79: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

AT Commands

If the screen shows no characters, enter the E1 command to turn modem echo on or enable local echo on the terminal.

Online Character Echo FIn some lower speed modems the F command determines if characters are echoed to the DTE from the modem when online. This function is generally controlled by the communications software. The modem does not support online character echo.

Hanging Up H, H1To end a call, enter the H command. This tells the modem to disconnect and go on hook. The modem must be in command mode to use this command.

Enter the H1 command to take the modem off hook. The modem automatically goes off hook when a dial command is keyed in.

Fast Disconnect H2, H3The results of the H command can be modified by the H2 and H3 commands. H2 or H3 will not cause a hang up but will affect the method of hanging up the next time the H command is issued. If H2 is entered, the H command will hang up according to CCITT V.32 standards. If operating in V.32 bis mode the H2 command could take several seconds. If H3 (the fast command) is entered, the H command will hang up much more rapidly at those speeds.

Command OperationE Echo off

E1 Echo on

Command Operation

H The modem hangs up.

H1 Forces modem off hook

H2 Sets H command to normal hangup procedure (long space, cleardown, protocol)

H3 Sets H command to fast hang up

Modem 3600 5-23

Page 80: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

AT Commands

EPROM Check IPC software packages may issue the I command to verify the modem will support all commands needed by the software package. The modem returns ASCII characters representing the model and revision level. To request the checksum to be calculated on the EPROM, enter the I1 command. The modem returns four ASCII characters representing the cyclic redundancy check (CRC) in hexadecimal form. Enter the I3 command to request the product version.

Speaker Volume LThe L commands offer three volume levels.

Speaker Control MThe M commands enable or disable the speaker for monitoring purposes.

Command OperationI Request product code

I1 Request EPROM checksum value

I3 Request product version

I4 Returns Motorola V.3600

I5 Last disconnect reason

Command Operation

L, L1, L2 Speaker volume low

L3 Speaker volume high

Command Operation

M Disables the speaker

M1 Disables the speaker while receiving a carrier signal

M2 Speaker always on

M3 Disables the speaker while dialing and after a carrier is detected

5-24 Modem 3600

Page 81: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

AT Commands

Return Online OUse the O command when you are operating in the online command mode and need to return to data mode. It returns the modem to the same mode (originate or answer) that it was in before escaping to the (online) command mode. Enter the O1 command to cause a retrain to occur before going back to data mode.

Long Space Disconnect YOne method of disconnecting two modems is called long space disconnect. When any disconnect condition is detected by the local modem, it will send 4 seconds of data space condition to the remote modem before disconnecting. This signals the remote modem to disconnect. The local modem will disconnect if it receives 1.6 or more seconds of data space condition from a remote modem. If break sequences of 1.6 or more seconds are to be sent, enter the Y command to disable this feature and prevent unintentional disconnects.

NoteThis option must be disabled if SDLC NRZI data is used.

V.22 bis Guard Tones &GGuard tones are not used in the United States. If required where operating the unit, select the appropriate guard tone.

Asynchronous / Synchronous Mode Selection &MThe &M commands select synchronous or asynchronous operation and synchronous dial method.

Command Operation

Y Long space disconnect off

Y1 Long space disconnect on

Command Operation&G No guard tone

&G1 550 Hz guard tone

&G2 1800 Hz guard tone

Modem 3600 5-25

Page 82: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

AT Commands

Use register S30 to select NRZ/NRZI for data format if using SDLC.

IMPORTANT: Synchronous DTE must be available to communicate with the modem if the V.25 bis dialer is enabled.

Make / Break Dial Pulse Ratio &PUse the &P command for the dial pulse to be on for 39% and off for 61% of one cycle. Use the &P1 command for the dial pulse to be on for 33% and off for 67% of one cycle.

Command Operation

&M Async data/dialer mode (V.25 bis disabled)

&M1 Sync data mode / async dialer

&M2 Sync data mode / DTR dials if active

&M3 Sync data mode / manual dial

&M4 Sync data mode (ASCII) with V.25 bis BISYNC dialer

&M5 Sync data mode (NRZ) with V.25 bis SDLC dialer

&M6 Sync data mode with V.25 bis async dialer

&M7 Async data mode with V.25 bis async dialer

&M8 Sync data mode (EBCDIC) with V.25 bis BISYNC dialer

&M9 Sync data mode (EBCDIC, NRZ) with V.25 bis async dialer

&M10 Sync data mode (ASCII, NRZI) with V.25 bis SDLC dialer

&M11 Sync data mode (EBCDIC, NRZI) with V.25 bis SDLC dialer

Command Operation&P 39% : 61% US and Canada

&P1 33% : 67%

5-26 Modem 3600

Page 83: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

AT Commands

Synchronous Transmit Clock Source &XThe &X commands select internal, external, or receive clock as the transmit clock source.

V.34 Rate Selection Thresholds *THThe *TH commands sets the V.34 rate selection thresholds. The V.34 modulation dynamically selects the optimum bit rate to run, based on line quality.

V.34 Asymmetric Bit Rates *ASThe *AS command enables or disables the V.34 asymmetric bit rate capability. This feature allows the modem to run different bit rates on the receiver and transmitter.

Modulation *MMThe *MM command sets the current modulation type to use when attempting to make a connection. Using this command automatically selects the maximum DCE speed (%B) for the selected modulation.

Command Operation

&X Internal clock

&X1 External clock

&X2 Receive clock

Command Operation*TH Low V.34 threshold (10- 6 BER)

*TH1 Medium V.34 threshold (10- 4 BER)

*TH2 High V.34 threshold (10- 2 BER)

Command Operation*AS Disable V.34 asymmetric bit rates

*AS1 Enable V.34 asymmetric bit rates

Command Operation

*MM Automode (typically used on dial line)

*MM1 V.21

*MM2 B103

*MM3 Reserved

*MM4 B212A

Modem 3600 5-27

Page 84: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

AT Commands

Maximum DCE Speed %BThe %B commands set the originating DCE speed to follow the DTE speed. When originating a call the two modems will not connect at a speed faster than the lower DCE speed setting of the two modems. To allow the modem to transmit data at a speed different from DTE speed, enter the %Bn command where n=1 to 18.

*MM5 V.22 bis

*MM6 V.27 bis 4-wire leased only

*MM7 Reserved

*MM8 V.29 4-wire leased only

*MM9 Reserved

*MM10 V.33 4-wire leased only

*MM11 V.32 bis

*MM12 V.34

Command Operation

%B Use DTE speed

%B1 300 bps

%B2 1200 bps

%B3 2400 bps

%B4 4800 bps

%B5 9600 uncoded bps *

%B6 9600 bps

%B7 7200 bps

%B8 12000 bps

%B9 14400 bps

%B10 600 bps

%B11 16800 bps

%B12 19200 bps

%B13 21600 bps

%B14 24000 bps

%B15 26400 bps

Command Operation

5-28 Modem 3600

Page 85: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

AT Commands

*Valid for V.32 bis modulation only

NoteUse the %B command after the *MM command when specific modulations are required.

Minimum DCE Speed %LIf the modem connects at a rate lower than the minimum DCE speed, it disconnects the link automatically.

*Valid for V.32 bis modulation only

%B16 28800 bps

%B17 31200 bps

%B18 33600 bps

Command Operation

%L Disabled

%L1 Disabled

%L2 1200 bps

%L3 2400 bps

%L4 4800 bps

%L5 9600 uncoded bps *

%L6 9600 bps

%L7 7200 bps

%L8 12000bps

%L9 14400 bps

%L10 600 bps

%L11 16800 bps

%L12 19200 bps

%L13 21600 bps

%L14 24000 bps

%L15 26400 bps

%L16 28800 bps

%L17 31200 bps

%L18 33600 bps

Command Operation

Modem 3600 5-29

Page 86: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

AT Commands

Auto Retrain %EThis option allows the modem to automatically retrain in response to poor received signal quality without reconnecting. The modem always responds to a retrain request from the remote modem.

Automatic Rate Adaption %RAutomatic rate adaption (ARA) allows the modem to automatically decrease the DCE rate when the allowable bit error rate is exceeded. If the line condition improves the modem automatically increases the rate.

Select this feature by front panel operation or AT command. Options include: disabled (factory default), low (BER= 1 in 105 ), medium (BER= 1 in 104), high (BER= 1 in 103).

The following guidelines apply to automatic rate adaption:• Automatic rate adaption is disabled during direct mode.• Manual rate adaption is disabled from the front panel when

automatic rate adaption is enabled. • Only one increment or decrement in the DTE rate is allowed at a

time during rate adaption from the initiating modem.• When online, initiator rate adaption occurs a maximum of every

12 to 14 seconds from the last occurrence of a rate adaption.• After the modem drops data rate because of poor signal quality,

the line must improve by approximately 2.5 dB before an increase in rate can occur.

Command Operation

%E Disable auto retrain

%E1 Enable auto retrain

5-30 Modem 3600

Page 87: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

AT Commands

Manual Rate Adaption *RRThe *RR command forces the modem to re-adapt the DCE rate of the remote modem.

Product Revision Level %VThe %V command displays the product revision level.

Command Operation

%R Disable automatic rate adaption

%R1 Enable automatic rate adaption using low BER: 1 in 105

%R2 Enable automatic rate adaption using medium BER: 1 in 104

%R3 Enable automatic rate adaption using high BER: 1 in 103

Command Operation

*RR Rate adaption to 2400

*RR1 Rate adaption to 4800

*RR2 Rate adaption to 7200

*RR3 Rate adaption to 9600

*RR4 Rate adaption to 12000

*RR5 Rate adaption to 14400

*RR6 Rate adaption to 16800

*RR7 Rate adaption to 19200

*RR8 Rate adaption to 21600

*RR9 Rate adaption to 24000

*RR10 Rate adaption to 26400

*RR11 Rate adaption to 28800

*RR12 Rate adaption to 31200

*RR13 Rate adaption to 33600

Modem 3600 5-31

Page 88: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

AT Commands

Online Quick Reference $HThe $H command displays an AT command set quick reference. The Enter key terminates the page displays and any other key scrolls through the pages.

Product Serial Number $VThe $V command displays the product serial number.

Talk / Data *DAThe *DA commands select talk or data mode.

V.32 Fast Train *FTThe V.32 fast train option is used to reduce training time when operating over high quality, limited distance dial, or 2-wire leased lines.

Incoming Call *ICThe *IC command makes the modem disregard an incoming call.

Line Current Disconnect *LCDial line operation only. The modem can be configured to disconnect upon loss or interruption of telephone line current.

Command Operation

$H Displays online quick reference

$H=<string> Search online quick reference for string.

Command Operation

*DA Switches modem to talk

*DA1 Switches modem to data

Command Operation

*FT Disable fast train

*FT1 Enable fast train

Command Operation*LC Line current disconnect off

*LC1 Line current disconnect short (8 ms)

*LC2 Line current disconnect long (90 ms)

5-32 Modem 3600

Page 89: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

AT Commands

Disable AT Command Set *NTThe *NT command disables the AT command set.

The *NT1 command allows the user at a remote modem to enable AT command operation of another modem via remote configuration.

If the AT command set of a local modem is accidentally disabled and must be recovered locally, reset the options through the front panel LCD, Main Menu #5, submenu CHANGE DTE OPTIONS?, “AT COM-MAND SET” section on page 4-8.

Dial Line Transmit Level *TDn

Private Line Operation

NoteFor a 2- or 4-wire leased line connection to succeed, one modem must be configured as forced answer and the other modem as normal originate. Both modems should have only one protocol, MNP or LAPM, enabled and Protocol Fallback must be disabled. DCE line speed must be the same for both modems.

4-Wire OperationIn 4-wire operation, the modem is a full-duplex, leased-line modem requiring a dedicated 4-wire leased line. Only point-to-point dedicated leased lines are supported. The 4-wire leased line connects to the TELSET/LEASED LINE jack on the modem rear panel. Dialing is not necessary. When connected via leased line the modems will train and begin communicating with each other. The DIAL jack can be used to connect a 2-wire dial-up line for dial backup.

Command Operation*NT Disable AT command set

*NT1 Enable AT command set at remote site

Command Operation

*TDn Sets dial line TX level to n where n is a number 9 through 30 corresponding to a TX level of -9 to -30 dBm

Modem 3600 5-33

Page 90: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

AT Commands

NoteFor operation with modems that use V.33 as the modulation type, the Modem 3600 must be set up to V.33.

2-Wire OperationIn 2-wire operation, the modem is a full-duplex modem able to operate over 2-wire leased or PSTN lines.

2-Wire Leased Line Operation

The 2-wire leased line is connected to the TELSET/LEASED LINE jack; the DIAL jack connects to a 2-wire dial-up line for dial backup. The leased line connects the local and remote modems directly and dialing is not necessary. One of the modems must be configured for forced answer and the other for normal originate. When connected via leased line the modems will connect and begin communicating with each other.

The &L command is used to select private line (leased line) operating mode. The *OR commands select the origination or answer mode when operating in the leased line configuration.

NoteDTR must be held high in 2-wire or 4-wire leased line operation. This is accomplished by DTE control, wiring pin 20 of the digital interface cable high, or by selecting the option IGNORES DTR. If DTR is terminal controlled, loss of synchronization can be corrected by cycling DTR. This makes the modem initiate the 2-wire training sequence. DSR goes off during the training procedure.

2-Wire Dial-up Operation:Connection to the telephone network is through the DIAL jack. A standard telephone can be connected to the TELSET/LEASED LINE jack for manual dialing.

5-34 Modem 3600

Page 91: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

AT Commands

Dial BackupDial backup allows the modem to switch to a dial backup mode if the data connection on the leased line is unacceptable for communications. This can be accomplished in two ways:

• Automatic - backup due to extended loss of carrier or 4 unsuccessful retrains in 3 minutes

• Manual - user determined using front panel controls or AT commands

In leased line operation, if both units have autodial backup enabled, one must be configured for forced answer. This prevents both units from dialing if the leased line fails.

IMPORTANT: Both methods will cause the modem to dial the prestored autodial number. The originate modem will wait for five seconds and then initiate the call. The answer modem will wait for a ring. The modems then train and begin communicating over the dial-up line. If the dial connection is unsuccessful after three attempts, a retrain on the leased line will be initiated.

In manual mode, the return to leased line is only done when commanded. In automatic mode the return to leased line is initiated after the lookback time in register S28 has elapsed. To prevent unnecessary termination of the dial line connection, a leased line lookback test is performed. If the leased line is not acceptable, the dial connection is resumed with a retrain. If the leased line is acceptable, the dial connection is dropped and normal leased line mode is resumed.

When the unit attempts to return to leased line, the LCD displays LEASE LOOKBACK. If the leased line has been restored to service, data can be passed approximately 10 seconds after LEASE LOOKBACK was initiated. The LCD will continue to display LEASE LOOKBACK for slightly more than a minute. During this time the dial line connection is maintained if a return to dial line operation is required. When the LCD displays ON LINE again the dial line is disconnected.

NoteA diagnostic test initiated during dial backup mode terminates when the modem performs a leased line lookback.

Modem 3600 5-35

Page 92: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

AT Commands

Dial / Leased Line &L&L selects line operation as required:

Dial Backup *DB

Return to Leased Line from Dial Backup *LBDuring dial backup operation, *LB makes the modem return to leased line operation.

During leased line operation with forced answer enabled, *LB makes the modem wait for a dial backup call.

Manual Dial Backup *LD*LD dials the autodial number if the modem is in originate mode with manual dial backup selected. Available in leased line operation only.

Answer / Originate *OR*OR forces the modem to answer or originate mode. This option is used during 2- and 4-wire leased line operation with error correction and/or dial backup.

Leased Line Transmit Level *TLn

Command Operation&L Dial (switched)

&L1 Leased (private) 2-wire

&L2 Leased (private) 4-wire

Command Operation

*DB Manual dial backup operation

*DB1 Automatic dial backup operation

Command Operation

*OR Force originate

*OR1 Force answer

Command Operation*TLn Sets leased line TX level to n where n is a number 0

through 30 corresponding to a TX level of 0 to -30 dBm

5-36 Modem 3600

Page 93: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

AT Commands

Configuration Commands

These commands recall various profiles for insertion into the active profile, store the active profile and telephone numbers in nonvolatile memory, and designate the powerup profile. Remote configuration is discussed on page 5-41.

Configuration Profiles

Modem operations are controlled by option settings selected from factory defaults stored in ROM, active settings stored in RAM, and custom settings stored in nonvolatile memory. These three code storage locations are called profiles.

Active ProfileThe active profile holds the current option settings and is used by the modem for all operations and functions. Any active profile option can be changed to meet an immediate requirement. The active profile is maintained in volatile memory referred to as S-registers.

Stored ProfileWhen an active configuration is established that meets all operating requirements, it can be transferred to one of the stored profiles. Two stored profiles are available for greater versatility.

If the active profile has been temporarily changed it can be reset to either of the stored profiles with the Z command. The &Y command selects one of the two stored profiles to be the powerup profile.

Factory ProfileThe factory configurations are stored in ROM and cannot be changed by the user; they can be transferred to the active profile and then modified to fit a specific application if needed. The &F command recalls one of the nine factory configurations.

Modem 3600 5-37

Page 94: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

AT Commands

Storing a Configuration &WThe &W commands store the current configuration options in one of two nonvolatile memory locations (Figure 5-1). The stored configurations are retained in memory even when power is off, or until &W is issued with a new configuration.

Figure 5-1. Configuration Storage and Recall

Powerup Option Set &YThe &Y command determines which user option set is loaded during powerup and reset.

Command Operation

&W Store options to user option set 1

&W1 Store options to user option set 2

Command Operation

&Y Powerup with user option set 1

&Y1 Powerup with user option set 2

&Y? Displays currently selected powerup option set

5-38 Modem 3600

Page 95: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

AT Commands

Load Factory Options &FnThe &Fn command loads one of the existing configuration sets, providing a complete configuration for a compatible system/network environment. Refer to the Appendix H for a complete list of the options in each set.

Reset to Stored Configuration ZThe Z commands reset the modem and immediately load either user option set 1 or 2 as the current configuration. This command saves time once a proven configuration is established.

Command Operation

&F, &F1 Load factory option set 1 (async dial-up with V.42 bis)

&F2 Load factory option set 2 (async dial-up without V.42 bis)

&F3 Load factory option set 3 (sync dial-up without V.42 bis)

&F4 Load factory option set 4 (sync 4-wire leased line without V.42 bis)

&F5 Load factory option set 5 (async 4-wire leased line with V.42 bis)

&F6 Load factory option set 6 (async 4-wire leased line without V.42 bis)

&F7 Load factory option set 7 (sync 2-wire leased line normal originate)

&F8 Load factory option set 8 (sync 2-wire leased line forced answer)

&F9 Load factory option set 9 (sync V.25 bis dialer)

Command Operation

Z Resets the modem and immediately loads user option set 1

Z1 Resets the modem and immediately loads user option set 2

Modem 3600 5-39

Page 96: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

AT Commands

View Configuration Profiles/Received Signal Options &VThis command lets the user view the current configuration profile in the form of S-register values. &V1 displays the received signal options.

Storing a Telephone Command Line &Zx=n, *CNx,n, *NDNine stored phone number locations of up to 31 characters each are available in nonvolatile memory. Normally, one phone number per location is accommodated. However, a phone number longer than 31 characters can overflow into the next location. Any spaces remaining in the overflowed location cannot be used for another number. The stored phone number is retained until replaced by another number. Modem power can be turned off without affecting stored information.

To store a telephone command line in a location, enter the &Zx=n command where x = the location and n = the number:

AT &Z 8 = 554-1212

In this example the command sequence to dial the indicated number is stored at location 8 for later dialing.

NoteNeither the AT prefix nor the D command should follow the &Zx=n.

• &Zx=n - Stores telephone number n, including dial modifiers, at location x (0-9, up to 31 digits).

• *CNx,n - Stores telephone number n, including dial modifiers, at location x (0-9, up to 31 digits).

• *CNx,- Clears telephone number location x• *ND - Displays the stored numbers (1-9).

Command Operation&V Displays configuration profiles

&V1 Displays received signal options

&V2 Displays active profile

5-40 Modem 3600

Page 97: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

AT Commands

Retaining / Restoring Options *ROThis option is used when the modem is shared by two or more DTEs.

When options are retained, the current configuration is not altered at disconnect. With options restored, the modem returns to the previously stored configuration on disconnect.

When options are restored at disconnect, the following commands return OK but are not executed:

• *CNStore telephone number• &ZStore telephone number• &FRecall factory configuration• &WStore current configuration

Soft Download Password %P1, $YSelect a numeric password to permit/inhibit software downloading via flash memory if desired. The process is detailed in Appendix H.

Remote Configuration

This mode of operation allows viewing or modifying the options of a remote modem that supports remote configuration. Remote configuration is performed using the front panel LCD or, more commonly, AT commands from the local terminal. Remote configuration is initiated by the local (master) modem through a proprietary protocol, a security code, and an acknowledgment from the remote (slave) unit to be modified. The security code is inserted and provides protection from unauthorized entry. The modems are shipped from the factory without a security code.

Command Operation*RO Retain options at disconnect

*RO1 Restore options at disconnect

Command Operation

%P1=pw Set software download password to 0-99999999

%P1=D Disable software download

%P1? Display software download password

$Y Enable soft download flash

Modem 3600 5-41

Page 98: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

AT Commands

NoteRemote configuration is supported at all rates except 300 bps.

Remote Configuration SecurityThe correct security code must be received by the remote modem before remote configuration can be established. Once established, the local DTE becomes a virtual terminal and can serve both local and remote modems. After starting remote configuration, the local DTE serves the remote modem.

To return DTE service to the local modem while in remote configuration, issue the +++ escape sequence.

Return DTE service again to the remote modem by issuing the O command. Switching DTE service between local and remote modems may be performed as needed.

To exit remote configuration, return DTE service to the local modem. The &T command will exit remote configuration mode.

Remote configuration may be entered immediately after dialing by placing the remote configuration command (%T=), without the = sign and followed by the security code, at the end of the dial string.

Remote Security Code %P=A security code prevents unauthorized access to remote configuration mode. This code is separate from low and high security passwords, which are discussed in Chapter 8. The security code is user programmable and can be set to any value from a single 0 to any combination up to 99999999 using the %P=(desired code) command.

Example: If the remote modem security code is 12345, the local modem must include this code in the initialization string before the remote modem responds.

5-42 Modem 3600

Page 99: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

AT Commands

The %P=D command disables remote configuration. To enable remote configuration, insert another security code.

IMPORTANT: Do not forget your remote security code. Keep your code in a safe place. If you do forget your code, contact Technical Support. Refer to the “Calling Technical Support” section on page 12-2.

Entering Remote Configuration %T=, &TThis mode of operation allows you to view or modify the option set of a compatible remote modem. Enter the %T= (security code of remote) command to initiate remote configuration.

The modem is shipped from the factory with security code (blank). This allows remote configuration by using (blank) as the security code.

Remote Configuration can also be specified by the dial command by placing %T (password) after the dial digits (the equal sign is left off). For example,

ATD 555-1212%T01234

Enabling/Disabling Remote Configuration *RAThe *RA commands enable and disable remote configuration.

Command Operation

%P= Sets security code to a value 0 to 99999999 entered after the equal sign

%P? Requests local security code to be displayed

%P=D Access for remote configuration is not possible when security code is disabled

%P=(blank) Clears security code

Command Operation

%T= This command followed by the correct security code establishes remote configuration

&T Exits remote configuration

Command Operation

*RA Disable remote configuration

*RA1 Enable remote configuration

Modem 3600 5-43

Page 100: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

AT Commands

Remote Configuration DTE Speed *RBThis option forces DTE speed to a particular setting, if desired.

Remote Configuration Format *RFSet word length, parity, and stops for remote configuration.

Command Operation

*RB Remote configuration DTE speed = 300 bps

*RB1 Remote configuration DTE speed = 600 bps

*RB2 Remote configuration DTE speed = 1200 bps

*RB3 Remote configuration DTE speed = 2400 bps

*RB4 Remote configuration DTE speed = 4800 bps

*RB5 Remote configuration DTE speed = 7200 bps

*RB6 Remote configuration DTE speed = 9600 bps

*RB7 Remote configuration DTE speed = 12000 bps

*RB8 Remote configuration DTE speed = 14400 bps

*RB9 Remote configuration DTE speed = 16800 bps

*RB10 Remote configuration DTE speed = 19200 bps

*RB11 Remote configuration DTE speed = 21600 bps

*RB12 Remote configuration DTE speed = 24000 bps

*RB13 Remote configuration DTE speed = 26400 bps

*RB14 Remote configuration DTE speed = 28800 bps

*RB15 Remote configuration DTE speed = 28400 bps

*RB16 Remote configuration DTE speed = 57600 bps

*RB17 Remote configuration DTE speed = 115200 bps

Command Operation*RF 7 data bits, mark parity, 1 stop bit

*RF1 7 data bits, no parity, 2 stop bits

*RF2 7 data bits, odd parity, 1 stop bit

*RF3 7 data bits, even parity, 1 stop bit

*RF4 8 data bits, mark parity, 1 stop bit

*RF5 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit

*RF6 8 data bits, odd parity, 1 stop bit

*RF7 8 data bits, even parity, 1 stop bit

5-44 Modem 3600

Page 101: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

AT Commands

Remote Configuration Saving or Discarding Options *RQThis option allows the opportunity to discard an undesirable option.

Command Operation*RQ Save remote configuration option selection and exit

*RQ1 Discard remote configuration option selection and exit

Modem 3600 5-45

Page 102: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •
Page 103: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Chapter 6Protocols

CCITT V.42 bis Error Control Protocol

V.42 bis is an industry standard for error control adopted by the Consultative Committee for International Telephone and Telegraph (CCITT). The CCITT V.42 bis protocol incorporates two error control algorithms, LAPM and MNP. LAPM is a CCITT Link Access Protocol family member related to LAPB and LAPD, currently in use in other communications applications. MNP is Microcom Networking Protocol, which has become an industry standard by the large number of its users.

The use of V.42 bis requires both local and remote modems to be V.42 bis compatible. Error control protocol is transparent to the user and requires no special hardware or software. Data to be transmitted is put in a buffer so the modem can retransmit it if an error occurs. The modem also buffers data received from the remote modem in case an error occurs and the data is retransmitted. To avoid overfilling the buffer, flow control is used to control data between the modem and the terminal. V.42 bis protocol options can be set by AT commands.

NoteError control protocols are only valid when using asynchronous DTE options.

Reliable Mode

When an LAPM or MNP link is established, the modem is in reliable mode. V.42 bis allows negotiation with a remote modem to the highest level of protocol common to both units. Both LAPM and MNP control data errors by retransmitting any block of data that was corrupted in transit. LAPM is assigned highest priority, and, if not supported, then an MNP connection is attempted.

Modem 3600 6-1

Page 104: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Protocols

Auto-Reliable Mode

In auto-reliable mode the modem negotiates to the highest protocol (LAPM or MNP) common to both modems. However, if a reliable connection cannot be established, auto-reliable allows the protocol to fallback to normal mode.

Constant Speed Interface

The modem serial port adapts to the data rate of the DTE and does not change speed if the DCE-to-DCE data link connects at another speed. Therefore, the DTE-to-DCE interface speed is constant.

Data Compression

Using MNP Class 5 data compression, the modem can achieve data throughput approaching 33600 bps. With LAPM data compression, the modem can achieve data throughput approaching 115200 bps. This increase in speed is achieved by automatically analyzing the data stream and reducing the number of bits required to represent the characters. 100% error-free transmission is assured by the application of the MNP or LAPM error control protocol on the compressed data.

Compression takes place only if the modem detects that the remote modem supports compression. If not, a reliable connection is made without compression.

Although data compression is compatible with any type of data, it is most efficient for ASCII text files. For maximum throughput when using data compression, the terminal should be set to a higher speed than the connect speed with the constant speed interface on and flow control enabled. When transmitting or receiving data files in one direction, the throughput can be increased for V.42 bis by having extra buffer and more processor time with the %C2 and %C3 data compression commands.

Normal Mode

No error control, with or without constant speed DTE interface. Data is buffered.

6-2 Modem 3600

Page 105: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Protocols

Direct Mode

The DTE speed and DCE speed are forced to be the same. No error control or buffering.

NoteIn direct mode, with the DCE link established at a rate other than the original DTE speed, the modem issues the connect message for the new DTE speed at the original rate. All subsequent data will be sent to the DTE at the new DCE speed.

Flow Control

If the serial port speed exceeds that of the modem connection, characters may be sent by the DTE to the modem faster than it can send them to the remote modem. The modem holds characters in an internal buffer until they can be transmitted. When this buffer is full, the modem uses flow control to cause the DTE to stop sending characters. As the modem continues to transmit data and the buffer empties, flow control is again used to cause the DTE to resume sending data. The modem can use hardware flow control (RTS/CTS) or in-band flow control (XON/XOFF).

Protocol Commands

These commands enable or control the various data compression, flow control, and error correction options of the modem. Tabl e6-1 lists the features associated with each mode.

NoteBold text indicates command parameter defaults.

Modem 3600 6-3

Page 106: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Protocols

Disconnect Buffer Delay %DSelect a delay during which the modem processes data in its transmit and receive buffers before disconnecting. When a condition exists which causes a disconnect, the modem tries for n seconds to empty its buffers. When the buffers are empty or if n=0, the modem disconnects immediately.

Table 6-1. Operating Modes and Features

Operating Mode

ErrorCorrection

DataCompres-sion

FlowControl Data

Con-stantSpeedInter-face

Normal Disabled Not applicable

Allowed Buff-ered

On or off

Direct Disabled Not applicable

Notapplica-ble

Notbuff-ered

DTE=DCE(slaved)

Reliable(MNP and LAPM)

Enabled On or off Allowed Buff-ered

On

Auto-reliable(MNP and LAPM)

Enabled On or off Allowed Buff-ered

On

Command Operation%D Disconnect buffer delay disabled

%Dn Disconnect buffer delay value (n = 1-255 seconds)

6-4 Modem 3600

Page 107: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Protocols

Serial Port (DTE) Constant Speed \JThe \J command allows DCE and DTE to operate at different speeds. The \J1 command forces serial port (DTE) speed to follow data link speed in any mode.

If the modem is in direct mode (\J1) and a DCE link is established at a speed other than that of the original DTE autobaud speed, the modem will issue the CONNECT message for the new DTE speed at the original rate. All subsequent data will be sent to the DTE at the new DCE speed.

NoteThe 230.4 kbps DTE speed is available, but the DTE will not autobaud to 230.4 kbps. With the modem set for 115.2 kbps, enter AT\J2 to enable the speed, and reset the DTE for 230.4 kbps. When the modem is set for 230.4 kbps, enter AT\J3 to disable it if needed. Reset the DTE for 115.2 kbps.

V.42 Optional Detection Phase \MThis is a data sequence that speeds up the LAPM link negotiation time if V.42 LAPM is supported by the remote modem.

Command Operation\J Disable slaved DTE/DCE (constant speed DTE on)

\J1 Enable slaved DTE/DCE (constant speed DTE off)

\J2 Enable 230.4 kbps as DTE speed

\J3 Disable 230.4 kbps as DTE speed

Command Operation\M V.42 fast detect data sequence disabled

\M1 V.42 fast detect data sequence enabled

Modem 3600 6-5

Page 108: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Protocols

Operating Mode \NSelect the V.42 bis mode to be used in data mode. An \Nn command issued during command mode while a connection is in progress will not affect the current connection but will be acted on for subsequent connections. LAPM or MNP protocol operation is referred to as MNP-only mode, and the auto-reliable modes allow protocol fallback.

Auto-Reliable Fallback Character %AnSelect the ASCII character to be recognized as the auto-reliable fallback character by the answering modem. During negotiation of protocol in auto-reliable mode, the answering modem switches from reliable to normal mode when receiving the auto-reliable fallback character from the calling modem and passes the character to the serial port.

Enter the %An command to set the auto-reliable fallback character (n=1-27 decimal representing an ASCII character).

NoteThe modem must be set for auto-reliable mode (AT\N3, \N5, \N6, \N7).

Command Operation\N Normal mode — no error control; data buffered

\N1 Direct mode — no error control; data not buffered

\N2 MNP only — try MNP; disconnect if not successful

\N3 MNP or normal — try MNP; fallback to normal async

\N4 LAPM only — try LAPM; disconnect if not successful

\N5 LAPM or normal — try LAPM; fallback to normal

\N6 LAPM or MNP — try both protocols; disconnect if not successful

\N7 LAPM, MNP, or normal — try both protocols; fallback to normal if not successful

Command Operation

%A0 Disable auto-reliable fallback character

%An Sets ASCII character to be recognized as the auto-reliable fallback character

6-6 Modem 3600

Page 109: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Protocols

Serial Port Flow Control \QThe \Q commands set the type of flow control used by the serial port. If the serial port speed exceeds that of the modem connection, characters may be sent by the DTE to the modem faster than it can send them to the remote modem. The modem holds characters in an internal buffer until they can be transmitted. When this buffer is full, the modem uses flow control to stop data from the DTE. As the modem continues to transmit data and the buffer empties, flow control is again used to cause the DTE to resume sending data.

• The \Q - \Q3 commands affect both DTE and DCE flow control.• The \Q4 - \Q7 commands affect only flow control by the DCE.• The \Q command disables flow control bilaterally.

When the \Q1 command is used, the modem generates and accepts XON/XOFF characters to start and stop the data flow. These characters have the same parity as the DTE setup taken from the last AT command.

When the \Q2 command is used, the modem uses CTS off to stop the data from the DTE and CTS on to restart it.

When the \Q3 command is used, the modem uses CTS off to stop the data from the DTE and CTS on to restart it. The DTE uses RTS off to stop data from the modem and RTS on to restart it.

The \Q4 command disables flow control by the DCE.

The \Q5 command enables XON/XOFF flow control by the DCE only.

The \Q6 and \Q7 commands force the modem to use RTS off to stop data from the modem and RTS on to restart it. This does not affect DTE flow control.

Command Operation\Q Disable bilateral flow control

\Q1 Enable bilateral XON/XOFF flow control

\Q2 Enable DTE CTS flow control, disable DCE flow control

\Q3 Enable CTS/RTS bilateral flow control

\Q4 Disable DCE flow control

Modem 3600 6-7

Page 110: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Protocols

XON/XOFF Pass Through \XThis option is active when flow control of the modem by the DTE has been selected for XON/XOFF and the connect mode is MNP-only or normal. It enables or disables sending local flow control characters (XON/XOFF) to the remote modem as well as being acted on in the local modem. In MNP-only mode the modem treats incoming XON/XOFF characters from the remote modem as data characters. In normal mode the modem will look at the \G command and act accordingly.

IMPORTANT: With \X1 in effect, local flow control characters are sent to the remote system. These characters may turn on the data flow from the remote system before the modem is ready to receive more data, possibly resulting in data loss.

Data Link Flow Control \GThis flow control paces data from the remote modem to the local modem during a normal connection. When the \G1 command is sent, the modem uses XON/XOFF to start/stop data transmission from the remote modem. This command is ignored during an MNP connection.

\Q5 Enable DCE XON/XOFF flow control

\Q6 Enable DCE RTS flow control

\Q7 Enable DCE RTS flow control

Command Operation

\X Process but do not pass XON/XOFF characters to remote DCE

\X1 Process and pass XON/XOFF characters to remote DCE

Command Operation\G Disable data link flow control

\G1 Enable data link flow control

6-8 Modem 3600

Page 111: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Protocols

Note The Modem 3600 will transmit the XON/XOFF characters to start/stop data transmission from the remote modem. The Modem 3600 will not respond to the XON/XOFF characters. This activity ensures that a false XON/XOFF is not detected resulting in data loss.

Break Control \KnUse \Kn (n = 0-5) to indicate the action taken by the modem when a break is encountered.

Conditions under which breaks may occur are explained below with descriptions of the modem's response under the different \K command break options.

A break is sent to the serial port while the modem is in connect state during a reliable or normal connection (no protocol, data buffered).

Command Operation

\K Break option 0

\K1 Break option 1

\K2 Break option 2

\K3 Break option 3

\K4 Break option 4

\K5 Break option 5

Command Operation\K, \K2, \K4 Enter command mode but do not send break to the

remote modem

\K1 Empty the data buffers and send break to the remote modem

\K3 Immediately send break to the remote modem

\K5 Send break to the remote modem in sequence with any data received from the serial port

Modem 3600 6-9

Page 112: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Protocols

A break is sent to the serial port while the modem is in connect state during a direct connection (no protocol, data not buffered).

A break is received from the remote modem while the modem is in connect state during a normal connection (no protocol, data buffered).

A transmit break command is issued while the modem is in command state during a reliable (protocol) or normal connection (no protocol, data buffered).

Inactivity Timer \TThe \T command specifies the number of minutes the modem will stay online without transmitting or receiving data before hanging up. When the value is set to 0, the timer is disabled.

Command Operation\K, \K2, \K4 Immediately send break to the remote modem and

enter command mode when break is through

\K1, \K3, \K5 Immediately send break to the remote modem

Command Operation

\K, \K1 Empty the data buffers and send break to the serial port

\K2, \K3 Immediately send break to the serial port

\K4, \K5 Send break to the serial port in sequence with any data received from the remote modem

Command Operation

\K, \K1 Empty data buffers and send break to the remote modem

\K2, \K3 Immediately send break to the remote modem

\K4, \K5 Send break to the remote modem in sequence with any data received from the serial port

Command Operation\T Disable inactivity timer

\Tn Set inactivity to n (n=1-255) minutes

6-10 Modem 3600

Page 113: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Protocols

Maximum Reliable Block Size \AThe \A command sets the maximum transmit block size for MNP connections. Use this command to force the modem to transmit smaller blocks in an MNP connection. A smaller block size maximizes throughput when marginal line conditions are causing errors. The modem sends a block up to the size specified by the \A command.

Transmit Break / Set Break Length \BThe \B commands tell the local modem to send a break signal to the remote modem. In all modes except direct, S79 determines the length of the break sent to the DTE by the modem receiving a break signal over the link. S79 may be set directly or via \Bn where n=1-255 in 20 ms increments. The default is 35 (700 ms).

Set Auto-Reliable Buffer \CThis determines whether or not a modem in reliable mode will buffer data received from a modem that is not in reliable mode during the 4 seconds in which the modems try to establish a reliable link. Use these commands when the modem is in the auto-reliable mode and is expected to process a call from a modem not in a reliable mode.

Command Operation\A Maximum transmit block size = 64 characters

\A1 Maximum transmit block size = 128 characters

\A2 Maximum transmit block size = 192 characters

\A3 Maximum transmit block size = 256 characters

Command Operation

\B Sends a break signal to the remote modem (does not modify S79)

\Bn Sets S79 to length of break desired; n=1-255 in 20 ms increments; default= 35 (700 ms)

Command Operation

\C Disable auto reliable data buffer

\C1 Buffer data for 4 seconds or 200 characters

Modem 3600 6-11

Page 114: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Protocols

V.42bis Data Compression %CThe %C command determines application of data compression while running LAPM protocol.

Command Operation

%C Data compression disabled

%C1 Enabled on transmit and receive data

%C2 Enabled on transmit data only (enhanced compression)

%C3 Enabled on receive data only (enhanced compression)

6-12 Modem 3600

Page 115: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Chapter 7 Test Mode Operation

Diagnostic tests are used to isolate faults in the communications path. Diagnostic tests terminate after the period of time specified by S18. If S18 is set to 0, the timer is disabled and tests will run continuously. Tests may also be terminated by the &T command. When in test modes without a test pattern, issue the escape sequence +++ to return to command mode before terminating the test with the &T command.

NoteLocal analog loopback with or without a test pattern is the only test available in protocol mode.

Test Categories

Diagnostic tests fall into two categories: those that can be performed online or offline and those that must be performed online. Refer to Table 7-1.

Table 7-1. Diagnostic Test s

Test Offline Online

Local Analog Loopback (LAL) X X

Local Analog Loopback with Self Test (LAL/TP ) X X

Local Digital Loopback (LDL) X

Remote Digital Loopback (RDL) X

Remote Digital Loopback with Self Test (RDL/TP)

X

Test Pattern (TP) X

Modem 3600 7-1

Page 116: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Test Mode Operation

NoteThese tests do not apply to fax mode and should only be performed when the modem is configured for data operation.

LDL, RDL, and RDL/TP tests are initiated after making an online data connection in normal or direct mode only. LAL and LAL/TP are initiated while in offline command mode. These tests can be initiated by AT commands or by using the LCD front panel SELECT TEST menus. Refer to Table 7-2.

NoteBold text indicates command parameter defaults.

Terminating a Test in Progress &T

Tests can be terminated manually or automatically. The &T command terminates a test manually. The modem automatically goes to command mode during LDL, LAL/TP, and RDL/TP tests. Enter the &T command to terminate the tests. For LAL and RDL, enter the escape sequence (+++) before the &T command to go to the command mode.

By preloading register S18 with 1 to 255, each test mode automatically times out after the specified number of seconds and exits back to the command mode. Loading S18 with 0 disables the auto timeout feature and the test will run continuously until manually terminated.

Table 7-2. Test Commands

Command Operation

&T Terminate any test

&T1 Initiate local analog loopback test

&T3 Initiate local digital loopback test

&T4 Grant remote requested digital loopback

&T5 Deny remote requested digital loopback

&T6 Initiate remote digital loopback test

&T7 Initiate remote digital loopback with test pattern

&T8 Initiate local analog loopback test with test pattern

%T Transmit test pattern

7-2 Modem 3600

Page 117: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Test Mode Operation

For example, to run the self test analog loopback test for 30 seconds, enter

ATS18=30&T8

The modem should respond with 000 after 30 seconds.

Testing the Local Modem

Test local operation with the modem offline in command mode. Use LAL and LAL/TP to test the local modem and the communications to the local DTE.

NoteFigures 7-1 through 7-5 include LED test indications. These indications are valid when DTE options are set by factory option set #1 and RTS is active from the DTE. Where indicated, RD and/or TD may be on, off, or flashing depending on the type of DTE and its operating state.

Local Analog Loopback &T1In Local Analog Loopback the modem transmitter connects to its receiver so the analog signal normally sent over the telephone line is received locally.

If operating on leased lines, the lines are terminated into 600 ohms (Figure 7-1). If off hook on a dial-up line, the modem is forced on hook.

Figure 7-1. Local Analog Loopback (4-Wire Operation and 2-Wire Operation)

Modem 3600 7-3

Page 118: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Test Mode Operation

For 2-wire operation, Analog Bilateral Loopback is invalid. In 4-wire operation, Analog Bilateral Loopback connects the receive line to the transmit line through a buffer amplifier.

Test the local DTE and cable by entering the &T1 command. Enter a test message and verify it is echoed on the screen. If it is not returned exactly as entered, the terminal equipment or data cable is at fault.

To determine if the data cable is defective replace it with a properly configured cable with electrical continuity. If the cable checks out but the problem remains, the DTE is defective.

If all local equipment checks out, proceed to the“Testing the Remote Modem” section on page 7-5.

Issue an escape sequence followed by &T1 to exit analog loopback.

Local Analog Loopback with Self Test &T8When the modem is offline in command mode, enter the &T8 command to put the modem in Self Test Local Analog Loopback (Figur e 7-2).

The modem transmits a test pattern. The test pattern is looped back to the receiver and checked for errors. Entering the &T command causes the modem to exit Self Test Analog Loopback. The modem responds with a three digit value between 0 and 255 representing the number of errors during test pattern detection. If errors occur, repeat the test to verify the consistency of the problem.

Figure 7-2. Local Analog with Test Pattern

7-4 Modem 3600

Page 119: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Test Mode Operation

Testing the Remote Modem

Use LDL, RDL, and RDL/TP in the online data mode to test the remote modem and phone line. Enter the escape sequence after making a connection to return to command mode. The appropriate test command, &T3, &T6, or &T7, can then be entered to initiate an online test.

Local Digital Loopback &T3After making the data connection, enter the escape sequence to return to command mode. Entering &T3 puts the local modem in digital loopback. The remote operator can now send a test message which is looped back to the remote terminal screen.

If the test timer (S18) was loaded before issuing the &T3 command the local modem exits the test after the specified number of seconds and returns to command mode. If not, enter &T to exit the test. Enter the command to return to online data mode.

The local modem receiver connects to its transmitter so received data is retransmitted to the remote site.

If Digital Bilateral Loopback is enabled locally, the local DTE is looped back to itself (Figure 7-3). If disabled, the local DTE receives a constant mark.

Figure 7-3. Local Digital Loopback with Bilateral Loopback Enabled

Modem 3600 7-5

Page 120: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Test Mode Operation

Grant/Deny RDL Request &T4, &T5Local operators can deny a request from the remote modem for remote digital loopback.

To allow your modem to be placed in RDL by a remote operator, enter AT&T4

To prevent your modem from entering RDL, enter AT&T5

Remote Digital Loopback &T6The initiating modem signals the remote modem to go to Digital Loopback. The remote modem receives and then retransmits data back to the local modem. If Digital Bilateral Loopback is enabled on the remote modem, the remote DTE is looped back to itself (Figur e 7-4).

Figure 7-4. Remote Digital Loopback with Digital Bilateral Loop Enabled at the Remote Site

After making the data connection, enter the escape sequence to return to command mode. Entering &T6 places the remote modem in digital loopback provided the remote operator has entered the &T4 command to allow an RL request. Enter a test message and verify the message is being looped back to your terminal screen. If the message is incorrect, use the analog loopback tests on both modems to isolate the problem. If both modems run analog loopback without errors, the problem could be with the phone line.

7-6 Modem 3600

Page 121: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Test Mode Operation

Remote Digital Loopback with Self Test &T7After making the data connection, enter the escape sequence to return to command mode. Entering &T7 places the remote modem in digital loopback provided the remote operator enters &T4 to allow an RL request. Once in RDL/TP, the local modem transmits a test pattern and automatically verifies that the remote modem is looping the pattern back (Figure 7-5). Enter &T to exit RDL/TP and return to command mode. Enter the O command to return online in data mode.

Exiting RDL/TP the modem responds with a three digit value between 0 and 255 representing the number of errors which occurred during test pattern detection. If errors occur, repeat the test several times to verify the consistency of the problem, then use the analog loopback tests to isolate the problem.

Figure 7-5. Local Modem Initiating Remote Digital Loopbackwith Test Pattern

Test Pattern %TIn Test Pattern, transmitted data from the local DTE is blocked and replaced by a V.52 compatible test pattern. When the modem transmits the test pattern, it expects to receive the same pattern.

Bilateral Digital Test Enable / Disable *DGEnable or disable bilateral test functions.

Command Operation

*DG Bilateral digital loop disabled

*DG1 Bilateral digital loop enabled

Modem 3600 7-7

Page 122: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Test Mode Operation

DTE Controlled Remote Digital Loopback (Pin 21) *RDTo enable DTE Controlled Remote Digital Loopback, enter *RD1. Enabled, the modem goes into Remote Digital Loopback when it detects an off-to-on transition of pin 21 while in the online data mode. The test ends when it detects an on-to-off transition of pin 21 and then returns to online data mode. To disable this function enter the *RD command.

NoteIf the test timeout option is enabled and pin 21 remains high, the modem returns to online mode at the end of the test timeout period and does not re-enter the test mode until an off-to-on transition of pin 21 is detected.

DTE Controlled Local Analog Loopback (Pin 18) *LATo enable DTE Controlled Local Analog Loopback Test, enter *LA1. Enabled, the modem goes into local analog loopback when it detects an off-to-on transition of pin 18. The test ends when it detects an on-to-off transition of pin 18. To disable, enter *LA.

NoteIf the test timeout option is enabled and pin 18 remains high, the modem returns to idle mode at the end of the test timeout period and does not re-enter the test mode until an off-to-on transition of pin 18 has been detected.

Command Operation*RD Ignore pin 21

*RD1 RDL enabled (pin 21)

Command Operation*LA Ignore pin 18

*LA1 LAL enabled (pin 18)

7-8 Modem 3600

Page 123: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Chapter 8Security

The Modem 3600 series provides three features to assure secure operation of the modem. These features are front panel password protection, auto callback, and secure mode of operation. Front panel password protection is discussed in Chapter 4.

Two levels of major security operation are available: high and low. The AT commands for each level are explained below.

IMPORTANT: Security requires that you have available your “superuser” password, explained in the “Superuser” section on page 8-6 and in the “Setting Passwords $Pn=pw$pw” section on pa ge8-8. Systems adminis-trator functions cannot be accessed without this password. If you forget the superuser password, contact Technical Support. Refer to “Calling Technical Support” section on pa ge12-2.

Autocallback Security

Autocallback is an additional security feature that is separate from Low and High Security. Autocallback forces an answering modem to dial the selected autodial (*AUn) telephone number after answering a call, holding the line for one second, and then disconnecting. When autocallback is enabled the modem will not train on a direct call. Access autocallback via Main Menu #5 on the LCD. Refer to Chapter 4 for further information. S72 enables/disables autocallback. S78 determines the delay in seconds before autocallback is initiated.

Modem 3600 8-1

Page 124: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Security

Low Security Operation

Low security operation provides password protection against unauthorized dial-up access. High security is another feature which is discussed later in the “High Security” section on pa ge8-4. The security feature can be enabled/disabled with AT commands when operating on a dial-up system.

Transmitted data and received data lines are suppressed to the host DTE during security validation; all other signals (CTS, DSR, RI, etc.) operate as selected. After the password has been validated, the modem operates normally.

Operating without Low SecurityThe modem is not factory set for security and operates like a standard V.34, except for additional AT commands which allow access to security. With these commands a user can set passwords and turn security on. When security is enabled, a password must be used to change security options.

Operating with Low SecurityA secure modem will not allow data transfer between its host and a remote host until a correct password is received from the calling party. If an incorrect password is received the secure modem disconnects. The front panel is not locked out because this type of security prevents unauthorized dial-up access.

Remote OperationThe originating modem must transmit the correct security code before the secure modem will allow data transfer. If accessing a secure remote modem, the local modem prompts the user with

PLEASE ENTER YOUR PASSWORD ?

To respond to the password prompt, enter AT$

followed by the password.

8-2 Modem 3600

Page 125: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Security

After receiving the $, the secure remote modem accepts the security code and waits for a carriage return. Entering more than ten characters is invalid and causes the secure modem to disconnect. Entering a valid password causes the calling party's DTE to display PASSWORD ACCEPTED.

Local OperationWhen accessing the local modem, the password is not required except when the user wants to change a security option. To change a password or to turn security on or off, the user must enter a password when entering the appropriate AT commands. EIA-232 signals to the DTE are not affected by security in command mode.

PasswordsTwo passwords of up to ten characters each can be stored in the modem's nonvolatile memory. AT commands change the passwords. Backspace and escape keys are not supported for password entry. The passwords can consist of any printable characters except a dollar sign, comma, or space. Passwords are case sensitive.

The passwords have the same priority level and are interchangeable with each other. This can be helpful in situations such as when the user forgets one of the passwords.

LCD Indication of SecurityThe front panel LCD indicates whether security is on or off. If disabled, the LCD appears as if the security does not exist. If enabled, Main Menu #1 consists of the following display:

SECURE 33600XXXX

Restrictions in Security OperationIf the caller gives the wrong password, while security is enabled, the modem will disconnect.

Low Security Commands

The following AT commands operate low security:

Modem 3600 8-3

Page 126: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Security

Set Password $S=xThe $S=x command sets an empty password location to x. This command only applies when no password or only one is stored in memory. It cannot be used to change a password.

Changing a Password $C=x, yThe $C=x,y command changes either password where x represents the old password and y is new one.

Deleting a Password $C=x, -The $C=x,- command deletes password x from memory. Security is automatically disabled if the last password is deleted.

Security Reset $DRThis command resets security to its initial state (off with no passwords stored). The option is not available in remote configuration.

Disabling Security $D=xThe $D=x command disables security where x is either password.

Security Status $D?, $E?The $D? or $E? command displays the current status of security (on or off).

Enabling Security $E=xThe $E=x command enables security where x is either password.

High Security

CompatibilityAn originating modem does not require security capabilities to connect with a secured Modem 3600. Access to the Modem 3600 host is gained by following the appropriate logon procedure as described in following text. All security operations are controlled by the secured Modem 3600.

CapacityThe modem stores in nonvolatile memory the password, security level, callback phone number, and status information for 50 users.

8-4 Modem 3600

Page 127: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Security

Operating without High SecurityThe modem is factory set with security disabled. In this mode the local DTE is connected to the local modem as usual, but the command to enable or view the status of the security feature will be accepted and processed.

Operating with High SecurityWith high security enabled, each user must follow the appropriate logon procedure. The procedure for remote users is determined by their assigned security level. Upon termination of the connection, the secured modem waits for the next call and password sequence. A local user must logon to the secured Modem 3600 to use the unit.

If a power outage occurs, the logged -on user must logon again when the power is restored. For optimum security operation a reliable connection should be used.

Security Levels

The Modem 3600 provides three levels of security to prevent unauthorized access by a remote user.

Level 1: Password OnlyThis is the lowest level of dial-up security. The user dialing in is prompted for an ID and password; if invalid, the modem hangs up.

Level 2: Password with CallbackThis security level also accepts only calls from preset telephone numbers. After the user enters a correct ID and password, the modem looks up the telephone number and calls the user back at that number.

Level 3: Password with Callback and Password Re-EntryThis is the highest level of security and is similar to Password with Callback except that after the user answers the callback call, the modem prompts again for the password.

Modem 3600 8-5

Page 128: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Security

Superuser

The superuser has access to all user information for administrative purposes and can change user logon requirements and privileges.

Superuser status can be gained at the local modem or from a remote modem via remote configuration, if the “Remote Superuser” option is enabled.

The superuser must first logon as a regular user, then request the superuser privilege.

Incorrect attempts to gain superuser privilege are logged in the user’s status information field in nonvolatile memory. After seven invalid attempts, the user is suspended from access to the Modem 3600 until cleared by the superuser.

To reinstate a suspended user, logon as a different regular user, then request superuser privilege in order to clear the illegal attempts count.

If the local superuser disables security, the only security commands available are those used to enable security or to check security status.

PasswordsPasswords can be changed or deleted by the superuser. The regular user can change his password only if the “user changes” option has been enabled by the superuser. Refer to the “Extended Features $W” section on page 8-9 for more details.

When calling from a remote location, the user is prompted for a password. After the password is entered, the user is either allowed direct access or disconnected and called back depending on the assigned security level.

During password entry or logon, each password character is displayed as an X on the DTE screen. The backspace key can be used for editing. For remote logon, press the Esc key at any time before pressing Enter to clear the password entry.

Incorrect password attempts exceeding the threshold set in S77 for a specific user will cause the modem to disconnect. Each call exceeding the threshold increments the ILLEGAL ATTEMPTS counter by one.

8-6 Modem 3600

Page 129: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Security

After seven calls (the default in remote configuration), the ILLEGAL ATTEMPTS counter will have reached maximum and the user will be suspended.

Default PasswordsThe modem is shipped from the factory with a default password for the superuser and for one regular user. They are

• SUPERUSER (System administrator)• USER 1 (User number 1)

Passwords for users 2 through 50 are left blank.

It is recommended that the superuser change the default SUPERUSER and USER 1 passwords as soon as possible.

High Security Commands

These commands are only available to a local superuser.

Enabling High Security $EH=pwThe $EH=pw command enables high security, where pw is the superuser’s password.

To initialize high security for the first time enterAT$EH=SUPERUSER

To enable security, enterAT$1=USER1

followed byAT$S=SUPERUSER

to gain superuser status. Passwords, security levels, and callback numbers can now be entered or modified.

When superuser activities are completed, return to regular user status by entering AT$$. In regular user status, AT$$ is the final local logoff command.

Disabling High Security $DEnter the $D command to disable security. The modem will operate as a nonsecure unit except that it will respond to enable and check security status commands.

Modem 3600 8-7

Page 130: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Security

Setting Passwords $Pn=pw$pwSelect a password between 4 and 34 printable ASCII characters.

To store the password enterAT$Pn=pw$pw

where n is the user number (0-50) and pw is the new password which is entered twice to ensure that is has been entered correctly.

The $ character is used as the marker between the dual password entries and cannot be used as part of the password.

Passwords cannot be recalled from nonvolatile memory.

NoteThe superuser password is critical because the security feature cannot be configured without it.

After logon as USER 1 and gaining superuser privileges, enter the $Pn command to modify passwords.

For the superuser enterAT$P0=pw$pw

For user 1 enter:AT$P1=pw$pw

Record the passwords in your personal records.

IMPORTANT: Systems administrator functions cannot be accessed without it. If you forget the superuser password, contact Technical Support. Refer to the “Calling Technical Support” section on page 12-2.

Set Security Levels $Ln=mThe System Administrator (superuser) assigns each user with a security level by entering the $Ln=m command where n is the user number and m is the security level.

Set User Callback Number $Cn=mThe callback number, used with level 2 or 3 security, is dialed by the modem after a user has successfully called in from a remote location and entered his password.

8-8 Modem 3600

Page 131: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Security

Level 1 security does not require a callback number; however, if the security level is changed to level 2 or 3 a callback number will be required.

The callback number should be programmed initially using the $Cn=m command. Where n is the user number and m is the callback number.

Extended Features $W

$W1

A regular user can change his password and callback number if the local superuser has enabled the $W1 option.

$W2

A remote regular user can gain superuser privilege once the local superuser has enabled the $W2 command.

$W0

The extended feature options can be cleared by a local superuser by entering the $W0 command.

Display Extended Feature Status $W?Enter the $W? command to display the status of the user changes and remote superuser options.

Display / Reset Illegal Access Attempt Counters $M, $Mn, $M*These commands inform the superuser of any illegal attempts to gain superuser status and the users current status. The status will either be "normal," indicating the user is still able to logon to the secure Modem 3600, or "suspended," indicating that the user made more than seven illegal attempts to gain superuser status and has been automatically suspended.

When the superuser logs on, the secure Modem 3600 automatically displays any illegal attempts since the last superuser logon. If it is not reset, the illegal attempt count will remain and the superuser will not be reminded unless more illegal attempts occur. To manually request this same information enter

AT$M

Modem 3600 8-9

Page 132: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Security

The Modem 3600 responds by scrolling any illegal attempt information onto the screen as in the following example:

USER NUMBER: 01, ILLEGAL ATTEMPTS: 1, STATUS: NORMAL

USER NUMBER: 14, ILLEGAL ATTEMPTS: 7, STATUS: SUSPENDED

OK

Enter the $Mn command (where n equals user number) to reset a specific user's illegal attempt count.

Enter the $M* command to reset all of the user’s illegal attempt counts.

Factory Reset $F=pw$pwTo reinitialize the security feature enter the $F=pw$pw command (where pw is the "current" superuser password). This command deletes all user information and reinstates factory default passwords. User information cannot be recalled.

Removing a User $RnThis superuser command removes a user from active status without deleting all of the user’s information. The user can be restored to active status by setting the password with the corresponding user number as previously mentioned. To remove a user, enter

AT$Rn

where n is the user numbers 2-50.

The superuser or user with ID #1 cannot be deleted from the user list.

Security Status $E?System security status can be verified using the $E? command.

Display User Status $S?Enter the $S? command to indicate whether or not the current user has superuser status.

The Modem 3600 responds with one of the following responses:SUPERUSER STATUSNORMAL STATUS

8-10 Modem 3600

Page 133: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Security

Verify User Information $In, $IBnSecurity level and callback number can be displayed using either the $In or $IBn command. To display the assigned security level and callback number for a single user enter

AT$In

where n is the user number. A regular user can only check his own information. A user with superuser privileges can check any user's information.

A user with superuser privileges can also display the assigned security level and callback number for each valid user within a block of ten consecutive user numbers by entering:

AT$IBn

where n is the first user number.

Request Superuser Privilege $S=pwOnce logged on as a user, superuser privilege can be requested by entering the $S=pw command, where pw is the superuser password.

When the correct password has been entered, the Modem 3600 responds with

SUPERUSER STATUS OK

Local Logon Command $n=pwEnter the $n=pw command to logon locally to the secure Modem 3600 where n is the user number and pw is the password.

Local Logoff Command $$To logoff after a local session enter

AT$$

Remote Logon Procedure $n=pwThe remote logon procedure is required to access a secure Modem 3600. When calling into the secure Modem 3600 from a remote location the user is prompted to enter a password. The password must be entered as

$n=pw

where n is the user number and pw is the user’s password.

Modem 3600 8-11

Page 134: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Security

If the password entry is incorrect, the password entry field will be cleared and the remote user will be allowed further entries until the number of invalid attempts matches the lockout threshold stored in S77. At this point the secure Modem 3600 drops the call.

If the password entry is correct the secure modem sends the PASSWORD ACCEPTED message to the remote site. Depending on the assigned security level, the user is given

• Immediate access to the DTE connected to the secure modem,• A callback sequence, or• A callback with password reentry.

When the call is terminated from either end the secure Modem 3600 automatically resets itself to the secure mode for the next remote or local user.

While a remote caller is initiating a call to the secure Modem 3600, all status messages and control leads which would notify the local DTE of the incoming call are suppressed. The secure Modem 3600 uses the value stored in S0 to determine the number of rings on which to autoanswer. If S0 is set to 0 incoming calls will not be answered.

If a local user is logged on during an incoming call, a RING message is displayed but the call will not be answered until the local user logs off, issues an A command, or presses the TALK/DATA button.

If the local user logs off, the call will be answered and the remote user must follow the normal password procedure. If the local user enters A or presses TALK/DATA the call to the remote user connects normally.

8-12 Modem 3600

Page 135: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Chapter 9 Fax Operation

The Modem 3600 can send and receive fax documents at speeds up to 14,400 bps, with the appropriate software. As a fax modem, the modem conforms to EIA-578, which defines a standard interface between a PC with fax software and the DCE as a fax modem.

When used with a Class 1 fax software package, Modem 3600 is CCITT Group 3 compatible and can send and receive documents at 2400, 4800, 7200, 9600, 12,000, or 14,400 bps with any Group 3 fax machine or PC with a fax modem.

Service Class selection configures the modem for Class 0 data mode or Class 1 fax mode. The LCD display indicates when fax mode is enabled. The Modem 3600 default configuration is for data mode; Service Class is normally only changed by the software as necessary.

Previous chapters in this manual contain information about the modem that should be understood prior to fax operation.

Read the fax software manual before attempting fax communications.

Fax Operation

The user's manual for the Class 1 fax software package should provide most information necessary to configure the software and send and receive faxes.

The information in Chapter 2 of this manual should be considered as well, and the “Modem Initialization” section on page9-2 provides important information for proper fax communications.

Modem 3600 9-1

Page 136: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Fax Operation

Modem Initialization

For fax operation, most fax software packages are equipped with a fax initialization command string. Entering this command sets the active profile for fax operation. In some cases certain options should be modified for particular requirements. The fax software manual provides information about requirements.

Fax Defaults

Factory defaults, along with the initialization command, support fax operation. Some initialization commands include the default command &F and will reissue it for each fax operation. Some fax software packages do not include the default command, or only issue the default command when the fax software is first loaded. Subsequent fax operations may not reset the fax profile and, if a fax required option has been changed, fax operation will not work.

An example of a fax initialization command is AT&F V E S0=0

This can be interpreted as:AT&FReset the active profile to the factory default. V Set response messages to digit code. E Disable local echo (off). S0=0 Disable autoanswer (off).

Fax AutoanswerSome fax software takes control of autoanswer, disables autoanswer for the modem, and answers the phone as internally programmed. Other programs do not control autoanswer at all and require the modem to have autoanswer enabled. You must check the software manual for the particular requirements and refer to Chapte r4 for manual/autoanswer and TALK/DATA selection. Select the necessary options for fax operation.

9-2 Modem 3600

Page 137: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Fax Operation

Fax Associated Options

A number of options can be changed without any effect on fax operation. These include items like speaker volume and pause for carrier. Appendix E lists the AT commands. These commands can be incorporated by personal preference into the initialization command. Compare fax operation requirements with Appendi xA and if necessary generate an initialization command string compatible with the software and the modem.

Stored Fax ProfileAnother alternative is to develop a fax initialization command and store it in one of the user defined profiles. Fax initialization would include the command that recalls that profile for fax operation. Keep track of option changes between fax transmissions and if required reset the fax profile for the next fax transmission.

Class 1 Details

Operation as a fax modem complies with EIA-578; details of Class 1 operation and compatibility are found in that standard. There is no need to be familiar with these details since they are handled by the Class 1 software package, but this section briefly summarizes some of them.

As a Service Class 1 facsimile DCE, the Modem 3600 provides the basic services required to support Group 3 facsimile operation. Support from a Class 1 facsimile DTE is required to implement the CCITT T.30 recommendations for fax document transmission and the CCITT T.4 recommendations for encoding fax images. Using software control, the modem can:

• Connect calls• Generate messages• Detect waiting and silence• Transmit and receive data• Provide HDLC data framing, transparency, and error detection

The modem also filters data streams to and from the DTE in accordance with the Class 1 specification.

Modem 3600 9-3

Page 138: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Fax Operation

The Class 1 standard assumes a serial asynchronous DTE-DCE connection using EIA-232D (or CCITT V.24) circuits. EIA-232D circuits AB (signal ground), BA (transmitted data), and BB (received data) are required for fax operation, while additional circuits are optional. Refer to Chapter 2 for hardware installation and EIA-232D data interface information.

The modem uses inband unidirectional DC1/DC3 (XON/XOFF) flow control to match the DTE-DCE data rate to the line signaling rate (hardware RTS/CTS is optional). Since 1200 bps is the minimum rate needed to support T.30 Phase C data transfer using V.29 9600 bps, a serial port data rate of at least 19,200 bps should be used with the modem. Since flow control is used, this rate should not be changed during fax operation. The modem detects the DTE-DCE data rate from the AT command prefix as described in Chapte r5.

Class 1 Commands

The commands in this section are normally issued by the fax software and not by the user. They are provided here for reference. While only the lower order 7 bits of each character are used for commands and parameters, T.30 Phase C data transmission or reception requires all 8 data bits. Therefore, a data format which uses 8 data bits should be used for fax mode.

Dial Command DThe dial command D, described in Chapter 5, tells the modem to go off hook, dial, and begin call origination. For fax operation, set the modem for Service Class 1 operation before the dial command is issued; use the +FCLASS=1 command.

The dial modifiers, except R, can also be used in fax mode. Depending on the X option selected, the modem will return the BUSY and NO DIALTONE result codes as appropriate. If the modem is in the online command state when a dial command is issued (e.g., a connection has already been established), the modem returns an ERROR result code. The NO CARRIER result code indicates that a connection could not be established (no carrier detected) within the number of seconds specified in status register S7, or the dial command has been aborted due to a character sent from the DTE.

9-4 Modem 3600

Page 139: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Fax Operation

After dialing the specified number in fax mode, the modem generates 1100 Hz CNG tones in accordance with T.30 while trying to detect either CED (answer back tone) or the HDLC preamble of the first T.30 frame. The CNG tones cease after detecting either of these two signals. To allow proper interaction with manually answered fax stations, detection of CED is not required. After detecting 1650 Hz (i.e., the HDLC preamble of the first frame), the modem enters V.21 Channel 2 receive state with HDLC framing and returns a CONNECT result code. This is because dialing in fax mode (+FCLASS=1) implies an initial +FRH=3 command described in the “Fax Transmit and Receive Modes” section on pa ge9-7.

Answer Command AThe A command instructs the modem to answer the call. For fax operation, set the modem for Service Class 1 operation before the A command is issued; use the +FCLASS=1 command.

If the modem is in the online command state when an answer command is issued (e.g., a connection is already established), the modem returns an ERROR result code. Otherwise, it answers the call and generates a 2100 Hz CED (answer back) tone in accordance with T.30. The modem then enters V.21 Channel 2 transmit state with HDLC framing and returns a CONNECT result code. This is because answering a call in fax mode (+FCLASS=1) implies an initial +FTH=3 command described in the “Fax Transmit and Receive Modes” section on page 9-7. To allow proper interaction with a manually originated fax call (in accordance with T.30), the modem does not require detection of CNG before generating CED or entering HDLC transmit mode.

If the DTE sends a character while executing the answer command and before CED is completed, the call is released and the modem will send the NO CARRIER result code.

On Hook HIn fax mode, the H command instructs the modem to stop any transmission and terminate the call by going on hook.

Modem 3600 9-5

Page 140: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Fax Operation

Off Hook H1The H1 command instructs the modem to go off hook. In fax mode, this might be used when the user has used manual dialing to place a fax call. In this case, no CNG tones are generated and the initial +FRH=3 is not implied; it must be explicitly issued by the software.

Class 0 Operation +FCLASS=0Setting the Service Class to 0 with the +FCLASS=0 command sets the modem in data mode. This default setting is normally only changed by software if needed.

Class 1 Operation +FCLASS=1Setting the Service Class to 1 with the +FCLASS=1 command configures the modem as a Class 1 fax modem. This command is normally only issued by the fax software if needed. When set, the LCD displays FAX CLASS 1 MODE.

Service Class Indication +FCLASS?The current Service Class setting can be determined with the +FCLASS? command. A 0 response indicates the modem is configured for data mode while a 1 indicates it is set for fax mode. This information text is preceded and followed by <CR><LF> in addition to being followed by an appropriate result code response.

Service Class Capabilities +FCLASS=?The available Service Classes can be revealed by the +FCLASS=? command. The modem responds with the information text 0, 1 (preceded and followed by <CR><LF>), indicating that the modem supports both data communication and Class 1 fax operation.

Transmit Silence +FTS=(Time)The command +FTS=(Time) causes the modem to wait in silence for the specified amount of time and then send the OK result code to the DTE. The (Time) value is in 10 ms increments from 0 to 2.55 seconds. The modem aborts the command and sends an OK result code if the DTE sends an additional character, which is discarded, during the command execution. This command returns an ERROR result code if issued while the modem is on hook.

9-6 Modem 3600

Page 141: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Fax Operation

Receive Silence +FRS=(Time)The command +FRS= causes the modem to listen for silence and report back an OK result code when the line has been silent for the specified amount of time. The (Time) value is in 10 ms increments from 0 to 2.55 seconds.

The modem aborts the command and sends an OK result code if the DTE sends an additional character, which is discarded, during the command execution. This command returns an ERROR result code if issued while the modem is on hook.

Fax Transmit and Receive ModesThe following commands instruct the modem to transmit or receive facsimile data with the designated modulation. Flow control, data buffering, and data filtering are used as appropriate, in accordance with the Class 1 specification. Each of these commands must be the last command on the command line.

The modem accepts one of the values listed in Table 9-1.

Command Operation

+FTM=(MOD) Transmit data with (MOD) carrier

+FRM=(MOD) Receive data with (MOD) carrier

+FTH=(MOD) Transmit HDLC data with (MOD) carrier

+FRH=(MOD) Receive HDLC data with (MOD) carrier

Table 9-1. Values for Fax Modulatio n

Value Modulation Speed

3 V.21 channel 2 300 bps

24 V.27 ter 2400 bps

48 V.27 ter 4800 bps

72 V.29 7200 bps

73 V.17 7200 bps

74 V.17 7200 bps *

96 V.29 9600 bps

97 V.17 9600 bps

*with short train

Modem 3600 9-7

Page 142: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Fax Operation

The Modem 3600 returns an ERROR result code if any of the above commands are issued while the modem is on hook.

Facsimile Transmit +FTM=(Mod)+FTM=(Mod) causes the modem to transmit data using the modulation and speed selected with the (Mod) parameter. For V.27 ter, V.29, and V.17 modulations, the modem first transmits the required training sequence (with echo protector tone). After it is appropriately configured for transmission, the modem returns the CONNECT result code and transmits constant 1 bits until data is received from the DTE. For additional information, consult the Class 1 specification.

Facsimile Receive +FRM=(Mod)+FRM=(Mod) causes the modem to receive data using the modulation and speed selected with the (Mod) parameter. If the selected carrier is detected, a CONNECT result code is sent to the DTE; if a different signal is detected, the modem sends a +FCERROR (CONNECT ERROR) result code and returns to command mode. This command is aborted if the DTE sends any character to the modem other than DC1 or DC3 during this mode. For additional information, consult the Class 1 specification.

98 V.17 9600 bps *

121 V.17 12000 bps

122 V.17 12000 bps *

145 V.17 14400 bps

146 V.17 14400 bps*

Table 9-1. Values for Fax Modulation (Continued)

Value Modulation Speed

*with short train

9-8 Modem 3600

Page 143: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Fax Operation

HDLC Transmit +FTH=(Mod)+FTH=(Mod) causes the modem to transmit HDLC framed data using the modulation and speed selected with the (Mod) parameter. For V.27 ter, V.29, and V.17 modulations, the modem will first transmit the required training sequence (with echo protector tone). Configured for HDLC transmission, the modem transmits HDLC flags and returns the CONNECT result code. HDLC flags will continue to be sent until the first byte of data is received from the DTE or until 5 seconds elapses with no data. For more information, refer to the Class 1 specification.

HDLC Receive +FRH=(Mod)The command +FRH=(Mod) causes the modem to receive HDLC framed data using the modulation and speed selected with the (Mod) parameter. If the selected carrier is detected, a CONNECT result code is sent to the DTE; if a different signal is detected, the modem sends a +FCERROR (CONNECT ERROR) result code and returns to command mode. This command will be aborted if the DTE sends any character to the modem other than DC1 or DC3 during this mode. For additional information, consult the Class 1 specification.

Test Supported Range of Values +FTx=?, +FRx=?The supported range of values for any of the fax transmit or receive commands can be determined with the +FTx=? or +FRx=? command where x is M, H, or S. The normal transmit and receive capabilities are interrogated with +FTM=? and +FRM=?, while the HDLC transmit and receive capabilities are interrogated with +FTH=? and +FRH=?. Since the modem can send and receive normal data or HDLC data at all valid speeds up to 14,400 bps, the modem returns the information text 3, 24, 48, 72, 73, 74, 96, 97, 98, 121, 122, 145, 146 for any of these four commands if x is M or H. For the commands +FTS=? or +FRS=? the modem returns the information text 0-255, indicating an allowed time interval from 0 to 2.55 seconds. The appropriate information text is always preceded and followed by <CR><LF> and followed by an appropriate result code response.

Modem 3600 9-9

Page 144: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Fax Operation

Class 1 Result Code +FCERRORIf the modem detects any carrier or tone that differs from that specified in a +FRM or +FRH command, it sends the +FCERROR result code and returns to command state, allowing the DTE to attempt a recovery. The numeric form of this response is +F4.

Fax Autoanswer +FAA=The modem can be set up to automatically detect if a fax or data call is being answered. The command +FAA=1 enables this function and +FAA=0 disables it. This feature requires special support by the fax software package.

DTE Autobaud for Fax Autoanswer *FRSet the fax autoanswer feature to autobaud at 19.2 kbps or greater, if desired.

Binary File Transfer

Some Class 1 software packages may provide an option for transferring files between computers with fax modems, using a Binary File Transfer (BFT) standard. Although the received file is not a fax image, transmitting the file is similar to sending a fax. Since the modem allows T.30 error correction mode (with HDLC framing up to 9600 bps), fax mode can also be used for BFT if supported by the Class 1 software package. The Binary File Transfer is an option in the fax software package, not a separate mode of operation.

Command Description+FAA=0 Disable fax autoanswer

+FAA=1 Enable fax autoanswer

Command Description

*FR Forced to > = 19,200 bps

*FR1 Forced to = 19,200 bps

*FR? Display this option’s current status

9-10 Modem 3600

Page 145: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Chapter 10Status Registers

S-Registers

Most modem configuration information is stored in a part of memory called status (S) registers. During operation this information is used to determine modem functions.

Information stored in S-registers can be changed by the AT or V.25 command sets and by pushbuttons in response to the LCD prompt. These are the preferred methods. Some software programs also access S-registers by the AT command set, but this action is transparent to the user. The command indicates which memory bit(s) to alter to select an option or to perform a function. The S-register values comprise the configuration profile.

Generally, the user should not directly alter S-register values. However, the user has the option of entering S-registers via ATS commands and directly altering the register value. This is called "writing" to an S-register.

NoteWriting to an S-register is not a preferred method and should only be used by programmers who need to manipulate S-registers so they can interact with a software program under development or a similar activity.

Some S-registers cannot be altered by the ATS command series. These are called “read only” S-registers. In addition to the definitions in this chapter, Appendix E contains a quick list of S-registers and indicates if they are read only or read and write.

Figure 10-1 shows how the inputs to an S-register (S22 in this example) are used to select a particular option. Bits 3 and 2 of S22 control speaker options. Some communication software packages may use the AT command set. For example purposes, bit values are arbitrary.

Modem 3600 10-1

Page 146: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Status Registers

Bit values for S-registers must not be confused with the total register value. Bit values are counted separately for each option group, called bit mapping, while the register value is the cumulative decimal or hexadecimal total. The decimal value counts all eight bits as a single group. Hexadecimal values split the bits into two groups of four each. Writing to an S-register changes the total value. Figure 10-2 shows the difference between decimal calculation and hexadecimal calculation.

Figure 10-1. Changing S-Register Values

Figure 10-2. Calculating S-Register Values

10-2 Modem 3600

Page 147: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Status Registers

S-Register Operation Sn?, Sn?^

Enter ATSn? to read a register value, where n=register number for a decimal value or ATSn?^ for a hexadecimal value.

For example, to determine the current backspace character enterATS5?

The screen will show the ASCII value of the backspace character stored in register S5.

Changing Register Values Sn=v, Sn=^vTo change an option using ATS commands requires the operator to precalculate the revised decimal (or hexadecimal) total.

NoteBecause of the chance of miscalculating the bit sum, causing unplanned option changes, writing to an S-register is discouraged. For operators who prefer this method of option selection a much simplified command that eliminates the decimal calculation is explained in the “Individual Bit Command Sn . # =v” section on pa ge10-4.

To change a register value, enter ATSn=v

where n = register number and v = decimal value, or enterATSn=^v

where ^v = hexadecimal value.

NoteNot all registers can be set by the ATSn=v (or ^v) command. Some registers are for reference only.

To change the escape character from + to the Esc key (ASCII value of 27) enter

ATS2=27

To return the modem to the command mode press the Esc key three times:

(pause) Esc Esc Esc (pause)

Modem 3600 10-3

Page 148: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Status Registers

Individual Bit Command Sn . # =vSome operators use AT commands as the primary method of changing S-register options. However, some options stored in registers do not have an associated AT command. For these options, the individual bit AT command can be used to change the setting of the bit controlling the option.

To change a single bit value within a register, enterATSn.#=v

where n = register number, # = bit position 0 through 7, and v = bit value 1 or 0.

For example, S-register 27, bit 2, selects between dial-up or leased line operation:

AT command method:AT&L selects dial-up operation (sets S27 bit 2 to 0).AT&L1 selects leased line operation (sets S27 bit 2 to 1).

Individual bit method: ATS27.2=0 selects dial-up operation (sets S27 bit 2 to 0)ATS27.2=1 selects leased line operation (sets S27 bit 2 to 1)

NoteThis way of selecting options can be used on all S-registers except read only registers.

Autoanswer S0This register turns the autoanswer option on or off. Set the register to 0 to turn autoanswer off.

Set the register to any value other than zero (1-255) to turn autoanswer on. The number selected is the ring count the modem answers on. For example, if S0 equals 4, the modem answers the call on the fourth ring. The default value is 1.

Ring Count S1This register contains the ring count for a current incoming call and should not be changed. If you are developing communications software, the program can read the register to determine the ring total.

10-4 Modem 3600

Page 149: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Status Registers

Escape Character S2The standard escape character is a + sign (ASCII value of 43). To change the character, set S2 to the desired ASCII value (0-127). To disable the escape command, set S2 to any value greater than 127 (128-255).

End-of-Line Character S3The standard end-of-line character is the carriage return (ASCII value of 13). This character ends each command as it is sent to the modem. It is also sent by the modem after each status message or number code. To change the character, set S3 to the desired ASCII value (0-127).

Line-Feed Character S4The standard character is the line feed (ASCII value of 10). This character is sent by the modem after each status message. To change it, set S4 as desired (0-127).

Backspace Character S5The standard character is the backspace (ASCII value of 8). To change it, set S5 to the desired value (0-127).

Pause Before Dialing S6When dial tone detection is disabled (command X, X1, or X3 in effect), the modem waits the number of seconds (0-255) stored in this register before dialing. The default value is 2 (seconds).

Pause for Ringback and Carrier Detection /Wait for 2nd Dial Tone S7If ringback is not detected in the number of seconds in S7 (1-255), the modem disconnects and sends the NO CARRIER message or code. If ringback is detected, the modem begins to look for a carrier.

If carrier is not detected within the number of seconds in S7, the modem hangs up and sends the NO CARRIER message or code.

Values between 1 and 255 may be used. The default value is 30 (seconds).

Modem 3600 10-5

Page 150: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Status Registers

Pause Interval for Comma S8When a dial command contains a comma, the modem pauses the number of seconds in S8. Change S8 to change the basic pause interval (0-255), or use several commas in a row for greater delay during dialing. The default value is 2 (seconds).

Carrier Detect Time S9S9 contains the amount of time (0-255) in 0.1 second increments that the carrier must be present to be recognized. The default value is 6 (0.6 second). This timer can be extended to lessen the likelihood of false detection of carrier.

Lost Carrier Detect Time S10S10 contains the amount of time (0-255) in 0.1 second increments that the carrier must be absent to be recognized as a loss of carrier. The default value is 14 (1.4 seconds).

DTMF Tone Duration S11S11 determines the length of DTMF tones. The period of silence is equal to the duration of the tone. The value of this register must be entered in multiples of 10. Default value is 80 (80 ms).

Escape Sequence Pause S12The escape sequence to return to command mode from data mode requires two pauses, one before and one after the escape characters.

The pauses prevent the modem from responding to a character sequence which might contain the escape sequence as part of its normal data transmission.

S12 contains the pause interval in 0.02 second increments. The factory setting is 50, equivalent to 1 second (50 x 0.02 sec). When S12 is 0, timing is not a factor.

The timing between the 3 escape characters must be less than the pause interval or the escape sequence will not be detected. The data rate also affects the timing and must be taken into account when changing the pause interval.

To disable the escape command, set S2 to a value greater than 127 instead of changing S12. Values between 15 and 255 may be used for S12.

10-6 Modem 3600

Page 151: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Status Registers

S13Not used

Bit Mapped S14NoteIn the tables for bit mapped S-registers, bold text indicates bit value defaults.

NoteWhen bit-mapped S-registers have parallel AT commands, the commands are listed in the register tables as a cross reference. If a command does not exist for the option, the column is left blank.

S15Reserved

Bit Value Command Description0 -- -- Reserved

1 01

EE1

Local character echo offLocal character echo on

2 0 1

QQ1

Response messages on Response messages off

3 01

VV1

Response messages as digit codesResponse messages as words

4 0 1 Q2

Ignore Response messages in originate mode only

5 0 1

TP

Tone dial Pulse dial

6 0 1

H2H3

Allow cleardownDisallow cleardown

7 01

*OR1*OR

Forced answerNormal originate

Modem 3600 10-7

Page 152: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Status Registers

System Tests S16This register contains the status of system test options.

S17Not used

Test Timeout S18Test timeout is the amount of time, in 1 second increments, that a diagnostic test will run and is determined by the value assigned to S18 (0-255). A value of 0 disables the timer allowing a test to run indefinitely. The default value is 0.

S19, 20Not used

Bit Value Command Description0 0

1-- Analog loopback inactive

Analog loopback in progress

1 -- -- Reserved

2 01

-- Digital loopback inactiveDigital loopback in progress

3 0

1

-- Remote digital loopback requested by other modem inactiveRemote digital loopback requested by other modem in progress

4 01

-- Remote digital loopback inactiveRemote digital loopback in progress

5 01

-- Self test remote digital loopback inactiveSelf test remote digital loopback in progress

6 01

-- Self test analog loopback inactiveSelf test analog loopback in progress

7 -- -- Reserved

10-8 Modem 3600

Page 153: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Status Registers

Bit Mapped S21

Bit ValueCommand Description

6, 0 00 100111

&S&S1&S2&S3

DSR forced on DSR on when onlineDSR off 5 seconds after disconnectDSR follows off hook (OH)

5, 1 00 1001

11

&C&C1&C2

&C3

DCD always on DCD on while carrier presentDCD on except for 5 seconds after disconnectDCD follows RTS on remote modem; not valid in reliable mode

2 01

&R&R1

CTS follows RTS by S26 delayCTS always on

4, 3 0001

1011

&D&D1

&D2&D3

Modem ignores DTR Modem assumes command mode when DTR turns offModem hangs up when DTR turns offModem resets when DTR turns off

7 01

YY1

Long space disconnect disabledLong space disconnect enabled

Modem 3600 10-9

Page 154: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Status Registers

Bit Mapped S22

Bit Mapped S23

S24Not used

Bit Value Command Description1, 0 00

011011

LL1L2L3

Speaker volume lowSpeaker volume lowSpeaker volume lowSpeaker volume high

3, 2 00011011

MM1M2M3

Speaker offSpeaker on until carrier detectSpeaker always onSpeaker off when modem is dialing

6-4 000

001

010

011

100

X

X1

X2

X3

X4

CONNECT message only, blind dials, no busy detectCONNECT / appropriate code for rate, blind dials, no busy detectCONNECT / appropriate code for rate, waits for dial tone, no busy detectCONNECT / appropriate code for rate, blind dials, reports BUSYCONNECT / appropriate code for rate, waits for dial tone, reports BUSY

7 01

&P&P1

Make / break ratio (US) 39/61Make / break ratio (UK) 33/67

Bit Value Command Description

0 01

&T5&T4

Remote digital loop request deniedRemote digital loop request granted

5-1 --- --- Reserved

7, 6 00011011

&G&G1&G2--

No guard tones550 Hz guard tone1800 Hz guard toneNot used

10-10 Modem 3600

Page 155: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Status Registers

DTR State Recognition S25The S25 register specifies the amount of time (0-255) in 0.01 second (10 ms) increments that DTR must stay high or low in order to be recognized as such. The default value is 5 (0.05 second).

RTS/CTS Delay S26The S26 register specifies the amount of time (0-255) in 0.01 second (10 ms) increments between the RTS signal and the CTS signal. The default value is 0.

Bit Mapped S27

Lookback Timer S28The S28 register specifies the amount of time in 1.0 minute increments that the modem will remain in dial backup mode before retrying leased line mode. A zero will disable automatic lookback to leased line. The default value is 15 minutes.

Bit Value Command Description

1, 0 000110 11

&M&M1&M2&M3

AsyncSync data / async dialSync data / dial through DTR Sync data / manual dial

2 01

&L

&L1 and &L2

Dial-up line Leased line

3 -- -- Reserved

5, 4 00 011011

&X&X1&X2--

Internal clockExternal clockReceive clockNot used

6 10

-- Enable async DTR dialerDisable async DTR dialer

7 -- -- Reserved

Bit Value Command Description7- 0 0-255 -- Time in 1 minute increments (0=disabled)

Modem 3600 10-11

Page 156: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Status Registers

Bit Mapped S29

Bit Mapped S30

S31Reserved

Bit Value Command Description

0 01

*NT1*NT

Enable AT command setDisable AT command set

1 01

*RO*RO1

Options retained at disconnectOptions restored at disconnect

2 01

*FT*FT1

Disable V.32 fast trainEnable V.32 fast train

6, 3 -- -- Reserved

7 0 1

*FB*FB1

DTE fallback disabledDTE fallback enabled

Bit Value Command Description0 -- -- Reserved

1 0 1

-- V.25 ASCIIV.25 EBCDIC

2 0 1

-- V.25 VAL enabledV.25 VAL disabled

4, 3 -- -- Reserved

5 0 1

-- NRZ V.25NRZI V.25

7, 6 00011011

&M&M4&M5&M6

V.25 disabled V.25 bisync enabledV.25 SDLC enabledV.25 Async enabled

10-12 Modem 3600

Page 157: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Status Registers

Bit Mapped S32

S33Reserved

Bit Mapped S34

DTR / Dial Backup Number to Dial S35Select the number to automatically dial (1-9 of stored numbers) for the modem to dial in DTR dialing or autodial backup.

S36-S40Reserved

Remote Configuration Escape Character S41Select the remote configuration escape character (1-255). The default is ASCII 61 (=).

Bit Value Command Description0 0

1&L1&L2

2-wire (leased line only) 4-wire (leased line only)

1 01

*LC1*LC2

Line current disconnect = shortLine current disconnect = long

2 01

*LC*LC1 or *LC2

Line current disconnect = disableLine current disconnect = enable

3 0 1

*DB*DB1

Dial backup = manualDial backup = automatic

7-4 -- -- Reserved

Bit Value Command Description

0 -- -- Reserved

1 0 1

*DG*DG1

Bilateral digital = disableBilateral digital = enable

2 0 1

*LA*LA1

DTE commanded LAL = disableDTE commanded LAL = enable

3 0 1

*RD*RD1

DTE commanded RDL = disable DTE commanded RDL = enable

7-4 -- -- Reserved

Modem 3600 10-13

Page 158: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Status Registers

Remote Configuration Guard Time S42Select the remote configuration guard time (0-255) in 20 ms intervals. The default is 50 (1 sec).

S43Reserved

XON Character from DTE S44Select the XON character (0-127) to be sent from the DTE. The default value is ASCII 17.

XOFF Character from DTE S45Select the XOFF character (0-127) to be sent from the DTE. The default value is ASCII 19.

S46-48Reserved

XON Character to DTE S49Select the XON character (0-127) to be sent to the DTE. The default value is ASCII 17.

XOFF Character to DTE S50Select the XOFF character (0-127) to be sent to the DTE. The default value is ASCII 19.

Dial Line Transmit Level S51The S51 register selects dial line transmit level from -9 to -30 dBm in 1 dBm increments. The default value is 10.

Bit Value Command Description4-0 0 to 30 *TDn (n=9

to 30)Transmit level in dBm (-9 through -30 dBm)

7-5 -- -- Reserved

10-14 Modem 3600

Page 159: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Status Registers

Leased Line Transmit Level S52The S52 register selects leased line transmit level from 0 to -30 dBm in 1 dBm increments. The default value is 0.

Automatic Rate Adaption Threshold S53

Bit Value Command Description

4-0 0 to 30 *TLn (n=0-30)

Transmit level in dBm (0 through -30 dBm)

7-5 -- -- Reserved

Bit Value Command Description0 0

1

-- Disable rate renegotiation above initial connectEnable rate renegotiation above initial connect

1 -- -- Reserved

3, 2 00

011011

%R

%R1%R2%R3

Automatic rate adaption threshold disabledLow BERMedium BERHigh BER

4 -- -- Reserved

5 01

Protocol negotiation status disabledProtocol negotiation status enabled

6 -- -- Reserved

7 01

*DR*DR=1

Disable distinctive ring detectionEnable distinctive ring detection

Modem 3600 10-15

Page 160: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Status Registers

Flow Control S54The S54 register selects the flow control options.

S55Reserved

Bit Value Command Description1, 0 00

011011

\Q\Q1\Q2\Q3

Disable DTE flow controlEnable DTE XON/XOFF flow control Enable CTS flow control to the DTEEnable bilateral CTS/RTS flow control

2 -- -- Reserved

3 0 1

\G\G1

Disable modem port flow controlEnable modem port XON/XOFF flow control

4 0 1

\X\X1

No XON/XOFF characters to remotePass XON/XOFF characters to remote

6, 5 00011011

\Q4\Q5\Q6\Q7

Disable flow control from DCEEnable XON/XOFF flow control Enable CTS flow control to the DTEEnable CTS flow control to the DTE

7 -- -- Reserved

10-16 Modem 3600

Page 161: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Status Registers

V.42 Compression Control S56

Bit Mapped S57

Inactivity Timer S58The S58 register specifies the number of minutes the modem waits before terminating a call when no data is sent or received. This register is active when in error control mode. 0 disables timer. Issue the \Tn command to load inactivity timer, n=0-255 minutes.

Bit Value Command Description1, 0 00

01

10

11

%C%C2

%C3

%C1

Compression disabledCompression enabled on transmit data onlyCompression enabled on receive data onlyCompression enabled on transmit and receive data

7-2 -- -- Reserved

Bit Value Command Description0 0

1

*RC

*RC1

Standard number codes 15 - 4800 bps 18 - 9600 bpsAlternate number codes 11 - 4800 bps 12 - 9600 bps

4-1 -- -- Reserved

5 01

Busy out disabledBusy out enabled during LAL test mode(for private PBX use only)

7, 6 -- -- Reserved

Bit Value Command Description7-0 0

1-255\T\Tn (n=1-255)

DisableTimer value in minutes

Modem 3600 10-17

Page 162: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Status Registers

Break Control S59The S59 register determines the action taken when a break is encountered. Refer to the “Break Control \Kn” section on page6-9 for further information.

Bit Value Command Description

2-0 000001010011100101

\K\K1\K2\K3\K4\K5

Break option 0Break option 1Break option 2Break option 3Break option 4Break option 5

7-3 -- -- Reserved

10-18 Modem 3600

Page 163: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Status Registers

Bit Mapped S60

DTE Options S61The S61 register indicates the character size and parity. This register is for reference only.

Bit Value Command Description0 0

1 %E%E1

Disable auto retrainEnable auto retrain

1 01

MNP compression disabledMNP compression enabled

2 0 1

\C\C1

Disable auto-reliable data bufferBuffer data for 4 seconds or 200 characters

5- 3 -- -- Reserved

6 0

1

\R

\R1

RI blinks for ring and remains on for duration of callRI blinks for ring and turns off when call is answered

7 0 1

\V\V1

Disable protocol response messagesEnable protocol response messages

Bit Value Command Description

2-0 -- -- Reserved

3 01

-- 7 bit word length8 bit word length

5, 4 00011011

-- Mark parityNo parityOdd parityEven parity

7, 6 -- -- Reserved

Modem 3600 10-19

Page 164: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Status Registers

Disconnect Buffer Delay S62The S62 register determines the delay before disconnect, to allow buff-ers to empty, when disconnect conditions exist.

Maximum Transmit Block Size S63The S63 register sets the maximum transmit block size.

Auto-Reliable Fallback Character S64The S64 register stores the selected ASCII value of the auto-reliable fallback character.

S65-66Reserved

Bit Value Command Description

7-0 01-255

%D%Dn

Buffer disabledDisconnect buffer delay value (seconds)

Bit Value Command Description7-0 63

127191255

\A\A1\A2\A3

Maximum block size = 64Maximum block size = 128Maximum block size = 192Maximum block size = 256

Bit Value Command Description7-0 0

1-127

%A

%An

Disable auto-reliable fallback character ASCII value 1-127

10-20 Modem 3600

Page 165: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Status Registers

Link Speed Status S67The S67 register indicates the true data link (DCE) speed. This register is for reference only.

S68Reserved

Bit Value Command Description

4-0 00000000010001000011001000010100110001110100001001010100101101100011010111001111100001000110010

-- N/A300 bpsReserved1200 bps2400 bps4800 bps7200 bps9600 bps uncoded9600 bps trellis12000 bps14400 bps16800 bps19200 bps21600 bps24000 bps26400 bps28800 bps31200 bps33600 bps

7-5 -- -- Reserved

Modem 3600 10-21

Page 166: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Status Registers

DCE Independent Speed S69The S69 register selects the DCE independent rate operation. When S69 is 0, DTE and DCE rates are equal and the maximum originate connect rate up to 14,400 bps is determined by S80. When S69 is non-zero, the maximum originate connect rate is determined by S69.

Bit Value Command Description

4-0 00000000010001100100001010011101000001100100101010000100101101100011010111001111100001000110010

%B%B1%B2%B3%B4%B5%B6%B7%B8%B9%B10%B11%B12%B13%B14%B15%B16%B17%B18

Use rate indicated by S80300 bps1200 bps2400 bps4800 bps9600 bps uncoded9600 bps trellis7200 bps12,000 bps14,400 bps Reserved16,800 bps19,200 bps21,600 bps24,000 bps26,400 bps28,800 bps 31,200 bps33,600 bps

7-5 -- -- Reserved

10-22 Modem 3600

Page 167: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Status Registers

Operating Mode S70The S70 register determines the protocol operating mode and action taken on an MNP link attempt failure. LAPM is assigned highest priority.

Example: With \N7 selected the modem tries an LAPM connection first; if unsuccessful the modem tries an MNP connection; if also unsuccessful, the modem connects in normal mode. Modes allowing protocol fallback are referred to as auto-reliable.

Operating Mode Status S71The S71 register indicates the level of error controlling protocol. This register is for reference only.

Bit Value Command Description2-0 000

001010011100101110111

\N\N1\N2\N3\N4\N5\N6\N7

NormalDirectMNP only (reliable)MNP or normal (auto-reliable)LAPM only (reliable)LAPM or normal (auto-reliable)LAPM or MNP only (auto-reliable)LAPM or MNP or native (auto-reliable)

3 01

\M\M1

Disable V.42 fast detectEnable V.42 fast detect

7-4 -- -- Reserved

Bit Value Command Description2-0 000

001010011100101110111

-- Protocol not activeProtocol negotiation in progressMNP level 2 activeMNP level 3 activeMNP level 4 activeMNP level 5 activeLAPM activeLAPM with data compression active

7-3 -- -- Reserved

Modem 3600 10-23

Page 168: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Status Registers

Bit Mapped S72

Password Timeout S73S73 sets the length of time the remote user has to enter a password before the secure Modem 3600 drops the call. The default is 0.

Callback Delay S74The length of time the secure modem waits to place the callback call after the remote user correctly enters a password and the call is dropped. The default is 15 seconds.

Callback Retry S75The number of times the modem will attempt to place the callback call to a remote user if the first attempt is unsuccessful. The default is 0.

Bit Value Command Description0 0

1

\J

\J1

Disable slaved DTE/DCE (constant speed DTE on) Disable slaved DTE/DCE (constant speed DTE on)

2, 1 -- -- Reserved

3 01

&R9&R2

CTS does not follow DCDCTS follows DCD

6-4 -- -- Reserved

7 01

-- Disable autocallbackEnable autocallback

Bit Value Command Description7-0 0-255 -- Time in seconds (0 = disable)

Bit Value Command Description

7-0 0-255 -- Time in seconds (0 = disable)

Bit Value Command Description

7-0 0-255 -- Number of attempts to place the call

10-24 Modem 3600

Page 169: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Status Registers

Callback Retry Delay S76The length of time that the modem waits, after an unsuccessful attempt to connect to the remote unit at the programmed callback number, before trying to place the call again. The default is 15 seconds.

Lockout Threshold S77Set the number of incorrect remote user password attempts that can be made before the call is dropped. The default is 0. When remote configuration is active, the lockout occurs after seven attempts.

Autocallback Timer S78The S78 register specifies the time in seconds that the modem waits before initiating autocallback. The default is 30 seconds.

Break Length S79The S79 register sets the length of the break sent to the DTE when a break signal is received. The range is from 1-255 in 20 ms increments. The default is 35 (700 ms).

Bit Value Command Description

7-0 0-255 -- Time in seconds (0 = disable)

Bit Value Command Description

7-0 0-255 -- Number of incorrect password attempts (0 = disable)

Bit Value Command Description7-0 0-255 -- Time in seconds before autocallback

Bit Value Command Description7-0 0-255 \B

\BnSend breakSet break length (n=1-255)

Modem 3600 10-25

Page 170: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Status Registers

Serial Port or DTE Speed S80The S80 register indicates the serial port speed.

Bit Value Command Description4-0 00001

00010000110010000101001100011101000010010101001011011000110101110011111000010001100101001110100

-- 300 bps600 bps1200 bps2400 bps4800 bps7200 bps9600 bps12,000 bps14,400 bps16,800 bps19,200 bps21,600 bps24,000 bps26,400 bps28,800 bps31,200 bps33,600 bps38,400 bps57,600 bps11,5200 bps

10-26 Modem 3600

Page 171: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Status Registers

Minimum DCE Speed S81

Negotiation Status S82

S83Reserved

Bit Value Command Description4-0 00000

000010001100100001010011101000001100100101010000100101101100011010111001111100001000110010

%L%L1%L2%L3%L4%L5%L6%L7%L8%L9%L10%L11%L12%L13%L14%L15%L16%L17%L18

DisabledDisabled1200 bps2400 bps4800 bps9600 bps uncoded9600 bps trellis7200 bps12,000 bps14,400 bps600 bps16,800 bps19,200 bps21,600 bps24,000 bps26,400 bps28,800 bps31,200 bps33,600 bps

7-3 -- -- Reserved

Bit Value Command Description

1-0 -- -- Reserved

3-2 0001

10

WW1W2

Disable negotiation statusEnable negotiation statusNo negotiation status; indicates DCE link rates

7-4 -- -- Reserved

Modem 3600 10-27

Page 172: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Status Registers

Bit Mapped S84

S85-S87Reserved

Modulation Type S88

S89-S90Reserved

Bit Value Command Description

0 01

-- Enable any key abort Disable any key abort

7-1 -- -- Reserved

Bit Value Command Description3-0 0000

000100100011010001010110011110001001101010111100

-- Auto modeV.21B103ReservedB212AV.22 bisV.27 (lease line only)ReservedV.29 (lease line only)ReservedV.33 (lease line only)V.32 bisV.34

7-4 Reserved

10-28 Modem 3600

Page 173: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Status Registers

Current Modulation S91 The S91 register is for reference only.

S92 - S94Reserved

Bit Value Command Description3-0 0000

000100100011010001010110011110001001101010111100

-- Auto modeV.21B103ReservedB212AV.22 bisV.27 (lease line only)ReservedV.29 (lease line only)ReservedV.33 (lease line only)V.32 bisV.34

7-4 -- -- Reserved

Modem 3600 10-29

Page 174: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Status Registers

V.34 Settings S95

V.34 Asymmetric Settings S96

Bit Mapped S97

S98- S100Reserved

Bit Value Command Description

0 01

-- Disable V.8 for non-V.34 answerEnable V.8 for non-V.34 answer

3-1 -- -- Reserved

4 01

-- Disable non-linear encoding Enable non-linear encoding

5 01

-- Disable pre-emphasis Enable pre-emphasis

6 01

-- Disable constellation shaping Enable constellation shaping

7 01

-- Precoding disabledPrecoding enabled

Bit Value Command Description

4-0 -- -- Reserved

5 01

-- Disable asymmetric bit ratesEnable asymmetric bit rates

6 -- -- Reserved

7 01

-- Disable TX power control Enable TX power control

Bit Value Command Description

1-0 000110

*TH*TH1*TH2

V.34 rate threshold low (10- 6 BER)Medium V.34 threshold (10- 4 BER)High V.34 threshold (10- 2 BER)

7-2 -- -- Reserved

10-30 Modem 3600

Page 175: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Chapter 11V.25 bis Autodialer

V.25 bis is an option that allows dialing functions to be controlled using synchronous data.

Select V.25 bis through the appropriate &M command in the AT command set (refer to the “Asynchronous / Synchronous Mode Selection &M” section on pa ge5-25).

If using the LCD,1) Scroll through the menu to Main Menu 5, MODIFY

CONFIGURATION.2) Advance to and enter the DTE PARAMETERS submenu.3) Select SYNC DATA.4) Advance to DIAL METHOD.5) Select one of V.25 BISYNC DIALER, V.25 SDLC DIALER,

or V.25 ASYNC DIALER, and then select either ASCII or EBCDIC character format.

NoteThe modem must be configured as V.25 SDLC ASCII NRZ for use with an AS400 IBM computer.

Modem 3600 11-1

Page 176: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

V.25 bis Autodialer

Autodialer Command Strings and Parameters

Most command strings for the autodialer include two parts: the command itself and the parameters that follow. For the purposes of this chapter, parameters can be telephone numbers or anything appropriate to V.25 bis as described in the following text. Parameters are separated by semicolons.

For example: PRN a; nnn . . . n

where a= the phone number address in memory and nnn...n= the phone number. The a and the nnn...n are both parameters. Not all commands have parameters. For example the CIC command has no parameter.

Software Guidelines• An indicator enclosed in less than/greater than signs represents a

specific character in the appropriate character set, ASCII or EBCDIC.

<sp> - space

• Each response below is considered an individual message by V.25 bis conventions. For example, a dial command with intermediate call progress enabled (BISYNC mode ASCII/EBCDIC character set) is:

From computer To computer<sy><sy><stx>CRN<sp>(205)555-0124<etx> <sy><sy><stx>VAL<etb>

• V.25 bis commands can be in one of these data formats:ASYNCBISYNCSDLC NRZSDLC NRZIin ASCII or EBCDIC

Access these formats using:&MAsynchronous dial/asynchronous data

&M1Asynchronous dial/synchronous data

&M2Dials stored number when DTR off/on transition is detected/sync data

11-2 Modem 3600

Page 177: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

V.25 bis Autodialer

&M3Manual dial/sync data

&M4V.25 bis dialer/BISYNC protocol/sync data (ASCII)

&M5V.25 bis dialer/SDLC protocol/sync data (NRZ)

&M6V.25 bis async dial/sync data

&M7V.25 bis async dial/async data

&M8V.25 bis dialer w/BISYNC protocol/sync data (EBCDIC)

&M9V.25 bis dialer w/SDLC protocol/sync data (EBCDIC) (NRZ)

&M10V.25 bis dialer w/SDLC protocol/sync data (ASCII) (NRZI)

&M11V.25 bis dialer w/SDLC protocol/sync data (EBCDIC) (NRZI)

• Separator fields depend on the data format.for ASYNC {sep} = command <CR>

BISYNC {sep} = <sy><sy><stx> command <etx> SDLC {sep} = <Flags><Addr><ctl> command

<FCS> where: <sy> = 16 hexadecimal<stx> = 02 hex<etx> = 03 hex<etb> = 17 hex<Flag> = 7E hex<Addr> = FF hex<ctl> = 13 hex (last frame), 03 hex (not last frame)<FCS> = Frame Check Sequence<CR> = Carriage Return

Invalid ResponsesExcept when stated otherwise, the following explanations for invalid INV responses apply:

INVCUAny transmission error (parity, framing, etc.).

INVMSThis message has one of three possible meanings:1) Receiving too many characters for any command.2) Any command followed by a semicolon ;

INVPSThis message has one of three possible meanings:1) Any parameter set ending with a semicolon ;2) Any parameter set containing too many or not enough

parameters; this includes - any command entered without parameters that requires parameters - any command entered with parameters that does not require parameters.

Modem 3600 11-3

Page 178: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

V.25 bis Autodialer

3) Any parameter containing too many characters.

INVPVThis message has one of three possible meanings:1) Any parameter set containing invalid characters2) Any parameter or parameter set containing no valid (only

ignored) characters3) Any parameter set containing an out-of-range parameter

Dial Parameters

Table 11-1 lists and describes the parameters used in autodialing. The memory available for dialing can hold up to 40 characters. Parameters inserted for readability are not counted.

V.25 bis Commands and Responses

The following sections describe the commands used with the V.25 bis autodialer and explain the responses received when each command is executed.

Parameters Function0 thru 9 DTMF and pulse digit

* and # DTMF digit

W Wait for 2nd type of dial tone

> Pause for 1 second

= Pause for 3 seconds

< Pause for programmed delay time

P Pulse dialing

T Tone dialing

& Flash (go on hook) for ½ second

; PARM separator

Space, dash, parenthesis, period

Parameters inserted for readability

11-4 Modem 3600

Page 179: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

V.25 bis Autodialer

Dial Command CRN nn...nThe dial command is a CRN followed by the number to be dialed nn...n. The modem accepts up to 40 dial parameters, excluding the CRN command and any leading spaces.

Responses:

VALValid command received. Transmitted on receiving an error-free command with no transmission error such as a parity error.This confirmation is sent before the command is executed.

INVCUInvalid command - command unknown.Example: TRN (205)-555-0124

INVMSInvalid command - message syntax error.Examples: CRN;(205)-555-0124 CRN; (semicolon invalid)

INVPSInvalid command - parameter syntax error.Examples: CRN (205)-555-0124CRN (205)-555;0124 CRN

INVPV Invalid command - parameter value error.Examples: CRN (205)-555-012Q CRN

CFIETCall failure - reorder or busy.

CFIRT Call failure - timeout occurred.

CFINTCall failure - no answer back tone.

CFIDTCall failure - no dial tone.

CFIAB Call failure - ABT detected but no carrier.

INCIncoming ring detected.

Program Number Command PRN a;nn...nThe program number command is PRN followed by the one digit decimal address a and the number to be stored nn . . . n. Each address can store up to 31 dial parameters. Ignored characters in the dial number are not stored. Nine stored numbers are available at addresses 1-9.

Responses:

Same as for the CRN command except for call progress responses.

Modem 3600 11-5

Page 180: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

V.25 bis Autodialer

Intermediate Call Progress ResponseThe following response is given only if enabled. See Option Definition 002 below.

CNX@nnnnnBPS

where nnnnn is the line speed. This connect response appears after handshake completed, but before DSR is activated. This response is required if the intermediate call progress option is enabled.

Dial Stored Number CRS aThe command for dialing a stored number is CRS followed by the one digit address a for the stored number to be dialed.

Responses:

Same as for the CRN command plus

CFINSCall failure - number not stored.

If the number is linked with other numbers via a PRL command, failure responses are returned as

{sep}a;{call progress messages} . . .

where a is the address dialed, followed by the separator field and call progress messages (CFI, etc.).

If the call fails to connect and the number is linked with other numbers, the autodialer tries to call the next number in the list of linked numbers.

11-6 Modem 3600

Page 181: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

V.25 bis Autodialer

Request List of Stored Numbers RLNThe request list of stored numbers command is an RLN.

Responses:

INVCUInvalid command - command unknown.Example:TLN

INVMSInvalid command - message syntax error.Example:RLN;

If no number is stored at the specified address nothing is returned for that address. The separator {sep} is a

<etb><sy><sy><stx>LSN<sp>

sequence for BISYNC format (the last LSN string terminates with <etx> per V.25 bis). For synchronous bit-oriented operation, each LSN string is treated as an individual message per V.25 bis.

All stored numbers are sent to the DTE asLSNa;nn...n{sep}a;nn...n...

where a is the stored number address and nn....n is the number stored.

Disregard Incoming Call DICThe command for disregarding an incoming call does not require parameters. If no call is incoming, the command is ignored.

Responses:

VALValid command received. Transmitted on receiving an error-free command with no transmission error such as a parityerror. This confirmation is sent before the command is executed.

INVCUInvalid command - command unknown.Example:TIC

INVMS Invalid command - message syntax error.Example:SIC;

Modem 3600 11-7

Page 182: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

V.25 bis Autodialer

Connect Incoming Call CICNo parameters are required. If there is an incoming call, the modem immediately answers the call. If no call is incoming, the command is ignored.

Responses:

Same as for the DIC commandI

Redial Last Number CRR nThe CRR n command redials the last number a maximum of n times. If no parameters are present, the modem redials once. Also, the maximum number of redials, the amount of time between redials, and other parameters may vary depending on application and national requirements if outside the U. S.

Responses:

Same as for the CRS command.

Failure response is{sep}r;{call progress messages}...

where r is the recall count (1 ≤ r ≤ n; 1,2...,etc.), followed by a separator field and call progress messages (CFI XX, etc.). If the call fails to connect, this is repeated for the specified number of times.

Link Number by Address PRL a;b This command links the number at address a with the number at address b. The addresses are one digit decimal values. Linking numbers enables different numbers to be dialed if a call failure occurs.

Only forward linking to one other number is allowed, so address 1 can be linked to 4 to 8 to 9 etc.; however (using this example), if address 4 is dialed by a CRS command without connection it links forward to 8 then to 9.

If all these fail to connect, the autodialer will not back-link to address 1 unless circular linking is used. Numbers may be linked as 4 to 5 to 3; however, if address 3 is dialed, back-linking to 5 is not allowed.

11-8 Modem 3600

Page 183: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

V.25 bis Autodialer

If circular linking (1 to 8 to 7 to 1) is used, dialing is discontinued after the addressed number in the dial command has been dialed twice. If only one parameter follows the PRL command, the number at address a is unlinked from its forward link.

For example, if the link list 4 to 8 to 3 to 7 to 9 to 1 exists and PRL 7 is received, 7 would be unlinked from 9, but not from 3. This would result in two link lists: 4 to 8 to 3 to 7 and 9 to 1.

Responses:

VALValid command received. Transmitted on receiving an error-free command with no transmission error such as a parityerror. This confirmation is sent before the command is executed.

INVCUInvalid command - command unknown.Example:TRL 1;5

INVMSInvalid command - message syntax error.Examples:PRL;1;5 PRL;

INVPS Invalid command - parameter syntax error.Examples:PRL 1;5; PRL 1;0;0 PRL 1; PRL PRL 001;5

INVPVInvalid command - parameter value error.Examples:PRL 1;Q PRL Q;1 PRL 1;45 where addresses 01-09 are defined

CFILDCall failure - no connection from link list.

Request List of Linked Numbers RLLThe request list of linked numbers command is an RLL with no parameters.

Responses:

INVCUInvalid command - command unknown.Example:TLL

Modem 3600 11-9

Page 184: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

V.25 bis Autodialer

INVMSInvalid command - message syntax error.Example:RLL;

LSLList linked numbers.

In all LSL examples, if no number is stored at the specified address no response is sent. The separator field for BISYNC is an

<etb><sp><sp><stx>LSL<sp>

The last LSL string ends with <etx> per V.25 bis. For synchronous bit oriented operation, each LSL string is treated as an individual message per V.25 bis. All linked numbers are sent to the DTE as

LSLa;l{sep}a;l

where a = stored address and l = link address.

Request List of Version RLVThe request list of version information command is an RLV with no parameters.

Responses:

INVCUInvalid command - command unknown.Example:TLV

INVMSInvalid command - message syntax error.Example: RLV;

LSVList version

The version information is sent to the DTE asLSV<sp>Sbbbbbbb00sccppddr / comment field

where bbbbbbb is the board number, s is the series number, cc is the controller code revision, pp is the data pump code revision, dd is the board dash number, and r is the printed circuit board revision followed by a comment field.

MODEM OPTIONS COMMAND PRO xxx;yy;0;0...The program options command is PRO followed by the starting register address (1 to 3 decimal digits), option count (1 or 2 decimal digits) and the data for each option (1 to 3 decimal digits per option). The “Options” section on pa ge11-14 lists all available options with definitions, possible settings, and default values.

11-10 Modem 3600

Page 185: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

V.25 bis Autodialer

The modem must be able to accept 40 non-ignored characters besides the PRO command (leading zeros and semicolons are not considered ignored characters).

Responses:

VALValid command received. Transmitted on receiving an error-free command with no transmission error such as a parityerror. This confirmation is sent before the command is executed.

INVCUInvalid command - command unknown. Example: TRO 0;1;1

INVMS Invalid command - message syntax error. Examples:PRO;0;1;1PRO;

INVPSInvalid command - parameter syntax error. Examples:PRO 0;1;0; PRO 0;1;1;1

PRO PRO 0;001;1

INVPVInvalid command - parameter value error. Examples:PRO 0;1;Q PRO Q;1;1 PRO 0;0;0 PRO 68;1;0

when option 68 is undefined for the modem.

INVPV<sp>xxxInvalid command - parameter value error. Example: PRO 10;5;0;0;0;2;1

This invalid message can be returned when a block of options is being changed. The conditions for this invalid response are as follows:

• An undefined option number is specified. In the above example, if option 12 is undefined for a certain modem (and no other error conditions apply) options 10 and 11 would be changed as specified in the command message. The next option to be changed would be option 12. The modem would detect that this is an undefined option, stop execution of the command, and return an INVPV012 message. Options 10 and 11 would still be changed as commanded; options 13 and 14 would be unchanged.

Modem 3600 11-11

Page 186: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

V.25 bis Autodialer

• An out-of-range value for a particular option is specified In the above example, if the fourth value in the option string is undefined or out-of-range for option 13 in a certain modem (and no other error conditions apply), options 10 through 12 would be changed as specified in the command message. The next option to be changed would be option 13. The modem would then detect that the value is undefined or out-of-range for that option, stop execution of the command, and return an INVPV013 message Options 10 through 12 would still be changed as commanded; options 13 and 14 would be unchanged.

Save Current Settings PRKPRK saves the current option settings.

Responses:

VALValid command received. Transmitted on receiving an error-free command with no transmission error such as a parityerror. Confirmation is sent before the command is executed.

INVCUInvalid command - command unknown. Example: TRK

INVMSInvalid command - message syntax error. Examples:PRK;0 PRK Q

Restore Factory Settings PRP nPRP n restores current option settings to factory option set n where n is a 1 digit decimal number.

NoteRestoring a factory option set other than factory option 9 disables the V.25 synchronous dialer.

If no parameter follows the command, the modem automatically selects factory option set 1.

Responses:

VALValid command received. Transmitted on receiving an error-free command with no transmission error such as a parityerror. This confirmation is sent before the command is executed.

11-12 Modem 3600

Page 187: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

V.25 bis Autodialer

INVCUInvalid command - command unknown.Example:TRP

INVMSInvalid command - message syntax error.Examples:PRP;1 PRP Q

INVPS Invalid command - parameter syntax error.Examples:PRP 1; PRP 1;1 PRP 001

INVPV Invalid command - parameter value error.Example:PRP 5

where factory default 5 is not defined for the modem. Current modem factory options are 1-9.

Request List of Stored Options RLO xxx; yyThe request list of stored options command is RLO followed by an optional 1 to 3 digit decimal address and a 1 or 2 digit decimal count. The “Options” section on page 11-14 lists all available options with definitions, possible settings, and default values.

Responses:

INVCUInvalid command - command unknown.Example:TLO 0;1

INVMS Invalid command - message syntax error.Examples:RLO;0;1 RLO Q;1

INVPSInvalid command - parameter syntax error.Examples:RLO 0;1;RLO 0;1;4 RLO 0;001

INVPV Invalid command - parameter value error.Examples:RLO 0;Q RLO 0;0

RLO999;45

LSOList stored options.

Modem 3600 11-13

Page 188: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

V.25 bis Autodialer

The separator {sep} for BISYNC is an<etb><sp><sp><stx>LSO<sp>

sequence for the sync format (the last LSO string terminates with <etx> per V.25 bis). For synchronous bit oriented operation, each LSO string is treated as an individual message per V.25 bis.

If no parameters follow, all stored options are sent to the DTE asLSOxxx;ooo{sep}xxx;ooo...

Each value must be padded with leading zeros so that each field has three characters. Option zero would be sent as

LSO000;000

If only an address follows the command, the single requested option is sent to the DTE as

LSOxxx;ooo

If address and count follow the command, the requested count of options starting with the specified address are sent to the DTE as

LSOxxx;ooo{sep}xxx;ooo...

Options

You can change the options for the V.25 bis autodialer using the PRO command or list them using the RLO command. Options are listed in Table 11-2.

Table 11-2. V.25 Autodialer Options

Option Definition Settings Default002: Intermediate call progress

messages0 - Disable 1 - Enable

0

003: Blind dial 0 - Disable 1 - Enable

0

007: Long space disconnect 0 - Disable 1 - Enable

1

11-14 Modem 3600

Page 189: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

V.25 bis Autodialer

051: Primary transmit / receive rate

007: 1200 bps008: 2400 bps034: 4800 bps 035: 9600 bps uncoded036: 9600 bps 046: 7200 bps047: 12,000 bps 048: 14,400 bps 049: 16,800 bps050: 19,200 bps051: 21,600 bps052: 24,000 bps053: 26,400 bps054: 28,800 bps055: 31,200 bps056: 33,600 bps

54 (28800 bps)

055: Transmit clock 0 - Internal 1 - External 2 - Receive (slave)

0

063: Autoanswer 0 - Disable1 - Enable (answer after 1 to 255 rings)

0

Table 11-2. V.25 Autodialer Options (Continued)

Option Definition Settings Default

Modem 3600 11-15

Page 190: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

V.25 bis Autodialer

064: Line current disconnect 0 - Off 1 - Short (8 ms) 2 - Long (90 ms)

2

076: Speaker control 0 - Off 1 - On 4 - On until CD 6 - Off when dialing

4

077: Speaker volume 0 - Low 1 - Medium 2 - High

1

085: Constant carrier RTS/CTS delay

0 to 250 ms10 ms increments

0

087: DTR dropout timer DTR must turn off for this length of time to be recognized.

0 to 255 in 10 ms increments

5 (50 ms)

089: Pause in dial string 0 - Invalid 1 to 255 seconds

2

090: Carriage return character ASCII or EBCDICcharacter range

13 dec

091: Line feed character ASCII or EBCDICcharacter range

10 dec ASCII; 37 dec EBCDIC

Table 11-2. V.25 Autodialer Options (Continued)

Option Definition Settings Default

11-16 Modem 3600

Page 191: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

V.25 bis Autodialer

092: Guard tone 0 = None 1 = 550 Hz 2 = 1800 Hz

0

093: Carrier detect delay 0 - Off; 1 to 255 10 ms increments

6 (60 ms)

094: Loss of carrier disconnect 0 - Off 1 to 255100 ms increments

14 (1.4 sec)

095: DTR dial address - Stored telephone number address to dial on DTR off-to-on transition

1

096: DTR dial 0 - Disable 1 - Enable

0

098: Call timeout 0 - Off 1-255 sec

30 sec

103: Signal quality retrain 0 - Disable 1 - Send training sequence on poor quality

1

111: Modulation mode 000: Auto-mode001: V.21002: B103005: V.22006: V.22 bis007: V.27 ter009: V.29012: V.32 bis013: V.34

Table 11-2. V.25 Autodialer Options (Continued)

Option Definition Settings Default

Modem 3600 11-17

Page 192: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

V.25 bis Autodialer

112 V.34 Select Threshold 000: Low001: Medium002: High

113 V.34 Asymmetric bit rates 000: Disabled001: Enabled

903: Bilateral loop - If enabled and a test is commanded, bilateral loop is defined as follows:Test Bilateral CommandedLoopLoop 1 Loop 2 Loop 2 Loop 1Loop 3 Loop 4Loop 4 Loop 3

Loop definitions per CCITT V.54.

0 - Disabled 1 - Enabled

0

904: Computer commanded remote digital loopback

0 - Disable 1 - Enable

0

905: Computer commanded local analog loopback

0 - Disable 1 - Enable

0

906: Remote commanded test 0 - Disable 1 - Enable

1

907: Test timer 0 - Until DTR drops TTT - 1 to 255 sec

0

Table 11-2. V.25 Autodialer Options (Continued)

Option Definition Settings Default

11-18 Modem 3600

Page 193: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Chapter 12Maintenance

WarningDisconnect power before performing maintenance. Although dangerous voltage levels are not exposed, disconnecting power ensures that no electric shock hazard is present.

General

The modem contains no internal electronic components that can be serviced or replaced by the user. Repairs should not be attempted by the user.

Fuse Replacement

If a fuse fails, replace it with one of equal rating. Repeated failure indicates a more serious problem.

Maintenance

The modem provides maintenance-free service. Periodically it is advisable to remove dust that has collected on internal components. If attempting to clean the modem, remove dust with a soft bristle brush and low pressure air or vacuum.

Before attempting diagnostic tests, verify that all connectors and plugs are firmly inserted. The test procedures identify the faulty component in a bad communications link.

Modem 3600 12-1

Page 194: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Maintenance

Calling Technical Support

The Service and Support page at the back of this User’s Guide contains several phone and faxback numbers and the Web address. If calling Technical Support, please call from a location near the computer with the modem. It helps expedite the call to have the following information available:

• Type of modem -- Modem 3600• Modem serial number• Date code• Purchase date• Type and version of software, including data communications,

fax, and browser/reader software• Type and version of other software running at the same time

NoteDo not return the modem to the manufacturer without prior authorization.

If the unit appears faulty, contact Black Box Technical Support at 724-746-5500 (USA) for service and assistance.

12-2 Modem 3600

Page 195: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Appendix ASpecifications

Size Width7.0 inches (17.78 cm)Depth10.5 inches (26.67 cm)Height2.25 inches (5.72 cm)Weight2 lbs. 13 oz. (1.28 kg)Front Panel32 ASCII character LCD

Environmental ConditionsTemperature:

Operation +32° F to +122° F (0° C to +50° C)

Storage -40° F to +158° F (-40° C to +70° C)

Humidity:0 to 95% relative humidity, noncondensing

Power RequirementsVoltage:115 Vac ±10%; 50-60 Hz, or 12 to 60 Vdc

Power consumption: 14 watts

Telephone LineBalanced 600 ohm type 3002 or equivalent 16 dB nominal loss, frequency translation up to ±10 Hz

Digital InterfaceConforms to EIA-232D and CCITT V.24

V.3600 A-1

Page 196: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Specifications

Modem Data Rates300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 7200, 9600, 12000, 14400, 16800, 19200, 21600, 24000, 26400, 28800, 31200, 33600 bps.

Fax Rates 14400, 12000, 9600, 7200, 4800, and 2400

ModulationsV.34, V.32, V.22, V.21, V.27 bis, V.29, Bell 103, Bell 1200, V.17, V.33, V.22 bis, V.32 bis

Fax Modulation Modulation Speed V.21 channel 2300 bps V.27 ter 2400 bpsV.27 ter 4800 bpsV.297200 bps V.177200 bpsV.177200 bps with short trainV.299600 bpsV.179600 bpsV.179600 bps with short trainV.1712000 bpsV.1712000 bps with short trainV.1714400 bpsV.1714400 bps with short train

Internal Transmit Clock FrequencySelected bit rate ± 0.01%

External Transmit Clock FrequencySelected bit rate ± 0.01%

Transmit Output Level0 to -30 dBm, selectable.

Operation4-wire, full-duplex, leased (private) line 2-wire, full-duplex, leased (private) line or PSTN

A-2 V.3600

Page 197: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Specifications

Carrier Detect LevelDynamic to -43 dBm

Telco Connection8-pin modular jack, dial and private lines

Testing511 PN pattern (per V.52) V.54 remote loopback control

Line EqualizationAutomatic adaptive

RTS/CTS DelayFrom 0 ± 2 ms to 90 ± 2 ms, user selectable in 10 ms increments (The default is 0 ms.)

Link Layer ProtocolsV.42/V.42 bis error correction and compression protocolMNP levels 2-5 error correction and compression protocol

V.3600 A-3

Page 198: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •
Page 199: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Appendix B Phone Jack Descriptions

DIAL Pin FunctionsThe DIAL jack connects to the PSTN dial-up lines. Pin functions are as follows:

TELSET/LEASED LINE Pin FunctionsThe 8-pin TELSET/LEASED LINE jack allows a standard telephone or a leased line to be connected to the modem. Pin functions are as follows:

Pin Function

1, 2, 3 Not used

4 R Ring side of telephone line

5 T Tip side of telephone line

6, 7, 8 Not used

Pin Function

1, 2 Transmit pair - 4-wire leased line or Tx and Rx for 2-wire leased line

4, 5 Ring and tip (respectively) of telephone line for a telephone

7, 8 Receive pair - 4-wire leased line

V.3600 B-1

Page 200: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •
Page 201: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Appendix CHardware Options

Jumper Option SelectionModem configuration is controlled by front panel pushbuttons and the LCD, AT or V.25 bis commands, and one hardware option jumper located on the PC board. Normally, jumpers do not have to be changed. If a change is required, remove the modem cover. The jumper diagrams on the following pages indicate the factory settings.

Removing the Cover

WarningDisconnect power before removing the cover. Although dangerous voltage levels are not exposed, disconnecting power ensures an electrical shock hazard is not present.

1) Place the unit on its side on a flat surface. 2) To disengage the cover’s locks from the the base of the modem,

insert a medium size flat screwdriver blade in one of the slots as illustrated in Figure C-1. DO NOT PUSH the screwdriver, but pry the lock open by applying pressure toward the unit.

3) Assist removal by pushing the cover from the base. 4) Repeat this procedure with the remaining three slots.

Modem 3600 C-1

Page 202: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Hardware Options

Figure C-1. Cover Removal

Bottom ofthe modem

Slots - Open the two slotson one side of the modemfirst. Then open the two on the other side.

C-2 Modem 3600

Page 203: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Hardware Options

Figure C-2 shows a typical jumper configuration.

Figure C-2. Jumper Location for Ground Option

Modem 3600 C-3

Page 204: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Hardware Options

Figure C-3 shows a typical jumper configuration.

Figure C-3. Typical Jumper Configuration

Ground Option JumperSignal ground is normally connected to chassis ground. If interference exists, isolate signal ground from chassis ground.

* factory setting

Replacing the CoverTo replace the cover, align the lock clips, rear guide grooves, and front lock tabs. Press the cover in place until the lock clips engage the lock prongs.

C-4 Modem 3600

Page 205: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Appendix DFault Isolation Procedure

Fault Isolation ProcedureThis diagnostic test procedure and the indicator lights built into the modem allow a rapid check of the terminals, modems, and telephone line interface. This procedure can be used to verify normal system operation and to isolate faulty equipment in case of failure.

Ensure the units are turned on and remote loops are enabled at both sites before starting the fault isolation procedure.

NoteIn some cases the observer must distinguish between rapid LED blinking and steady on in tests.

Telephone Interface1) Connect the modem to the dial-in line by the LINE jack on the back

panel.2) If the dial line is installed with a standard data jack, connect a

standard telephone to the TELSET/LEASED LINE jack on the back panel of the modem and use the standard telephone procedure.

Standard Phone1) Configure the modem to V.34 33600 IDLE mode by pressing the

TALK/ DATA button, and then lift the receiver. No dial tone is heard. Press the TALK/DATA button to display V.34 IDLE and wait for dial tone.

2) Dial out; the phone should operate normally.

Modem 3600 D-1

Page 206: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Hardware Options

Modem and Telephone Line Check

Part I1) Configure the modem for LOCAL ANALOG LOOP WITH

TEST PATTERN. This terminates the local modem telephone lines into 600 ohms and connects the local modem transmit output amplifier back to its own receiver through the AGC. Transmit input data from the terminal is inhibited and is substituted with a V.52 test pattern.

2) This test checks operation of the local modem modulator and demodulator circuitry and should be attempted at both local and remote sites if operators are available.

3) When random errors are present, the TEST PATTERN ERRORS display counts receive errors.

4) If the circuitry is working properly, the front panel indicators show the following:

5) Configure the modem for LOCAL ANALOG LOOP to switch the transmitter back to its normal data input.

6) If the transmit data input is in a mark hold condition, both the TD and RD indicators should remain off.

7) If the transmit data input is in a space hold condition, both the TD and RD indicators should come on. All other indicators should remain the same.

8) If the indicators are correct, the modem is probably operating correctly.

9) If the preceding tests were not successful, call Technical Services. Refer to the “Calling Technical Support” section on page 12-2.

D-2 Modem 3600

Page 207: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Hardware Options

Part IIThis part determines the performance of the local and remote modems and the telephone circuits. It also determines each modem's ability to receive a transmitted signal from the other site, properly equalize and decode the signal and then loop this regenerated signal into the transmitter for transmission back to the other modem. This test applies to both leased line and dial line operation.

1) Configure the local modem for REMOTE DIGITAL LOOP WITH TEST PATTERN. This signals the remote modem to go into digital loop. The remote modem receives and then retransmits the data back to the local mode. If the digital bilateral loop is enabled at the remote, the remote DTE is looped back to itself.

2) An alternative to the above procedure is to request the operator at the remote modem to configure his modem for LOCAL DIGITAL LOOP. Configure the local modem for TEST PATTERN. The remote modem receives and retransmits the data back to the local modem.

3) The TEST PATTERN ERRORS display will count received errors.

4) At the local modem, the indicators should be as follows:

5) To further test the modem and communications link, reverse the system loopback. First exit the existing loopback test. Reverse the roles of the local and remote modems and repeat step two.

NoteIf the bilateral digital loop is enabled at the local modem, the DTE interface is looped to itself and permits the DTE to check the interface circuitry as well as itself.

Modem 3600 D-3

Page 208: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •
Page 209: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Appendix ECommand Index and Defaults

GeneralThis reference guide provides asynchronous command characters and their descriptions. The pages listed provide initial information on the commands. The S-registers listed are cross references (see the“Status Registers” section on page -21).

NoteBold text indicates command parameter defaults.

Command Page S-Reg Description

AT page 5-3

-- Attention code - command prefix

A/ page 5-4

-- Repeat last command

+ + + page 5-22

S2, S12

Escape sequence (pause, + + +, pause)

A page 5-17

-- Answer

D page 5-13,page 9-4

-- Dial

Dial Modifiers:

T page 5-14

S14 Tone dial

P S14 Pulse dial

, S8 Long pause (2 sec or S8 value)

† cannot be executed from remote configuration mode

Modem 3600 E-1

Page 210: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Hardware Options

W page 5-14

S7 Wait for 2nd dial tone (S7 value)

! -- Flash switchboard

R -- Switch to answer mode after dialing

; -- Return to command mode after dialing

@ page 5-15

-- Wait for 5 seconds of silence

Sn -- Dial stored command line

E page 5-22

S14 Local character echo off

E1 S14 Local character echo on

H page 5-23

-- Hang up †

H1 -- Forces modem off hook †

H2 S14 Set H command to V.32 †

H3 S14 Set H command to fast †

I page 5-24

-- Request product code

I1 -- Request EPROM CRC value

I3 -- Request product version

I4 -- Returns Modem 3600

I5 -- Disconnect reason

L, L1, L2 page 5-24

S22 Speaker volume low

L3 S22 Speaker volume high

M page 5-24

S22 Speaker off

M1 S22 Speaker off when carrier is present

M2 S22 Speaker always on

M3 S22 Speaker off when dialing and carrier is present

O page 5-25

-- Restore data mode (after escape) †

O1 -- Retrain and restores data mode (after escape) †

Q page 5-6

S14 Response displays on

Q1 S14 Response displays off

Q2 S14 Response displays on in originate mode only

Command Page S-Reg Description

† cannot be executed from remote configuration mode

E-2 Modem 3600

Page 211: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Hardware Options

Sn? page 10-3

-- Read value in register n (decimal)

Sn?^ -- Read value in register n (hexadecimal)

Sn=v -- Set v (value) in register n (decimal)

Sn=v^ page 10-3

-- Set v (value) in register n (hexadecimal)

Sn.#=v page 10-4

-- Set single bit value in register n,#= bit position 0-7, v = bit value 1 or 0

V page 5-6

S14 Response codes

V1 S14 Response messages

W page 5-6

S82 Negotiation display disabled

W1 S82 Negotiation display enabled

W2 S82 Displays DCE link rate

X S22 CONNECT (code 1), for all speeds, no dial tone or busy signal detection

X1 S22 Appropriate connect codes for rate, no dial tone detection

X2 S22 Wait for dial tone (appropriate connect codes)

X3 S22 Detect busy signal (appropriate connect codes)

X4 S22 Wait for dial tone, detect busy signal (appropriate connect codes)

Y page 5-25

S21 Long space disconnect disabled

Y1 S21 Long space disconnect enabled

Z page 5-39

-- Reset to user option set #1 †

Z1 -- Reset to user option set #2 †

&C page 5-19

S21 DCD always on

&C1 S21 DCD on while carrier is present

&C2 S21 DCD off 5 seconds after disconnect

&C3 S21 DCD follows remote RTS

Command Page S-Reg Description

† cannot be executed from remote configuration mode

Modem 3600 E-3

Page 212: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Hardware Options

&D page 5-20

S21 DTR ignored

&D1 S21 DTR recalls command mode

&D2 S21 DTR disconnects

&D3 page 5-20

S21 DTR disconnects and resets modem to stored configuration

&F or &F1 page 5-39

-- Restore factory configuration 1 †

&F2 -- Restore factory configuration 2 †

&F3 -- Restore factory configuration 3 †

&F4 -- Restore factory configuration 4 †

&F5 -- Restore factory configuration 5 †

&F6 -- Restore factory configuration 6 †

&F7 -- Restore factory configuration 7 †

&F8 -- Restore factory configuration 8 †

&F9 -- Restore factory configuration 9 †

&G page 5-25

S23 No guard tone

&G1 S23 550 Hz tone

&G2 S23 1800 Hz tone

&L page 5-36

S27 Dial line †

&L1 S27,S32

Leased line 2-wire †

&L2 S27,S32

Leased line 4-wire †

Command Page S-Reg Description

† cannot be executed from remote configuration mode

E-4 Modem 3600

Page 213: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Hardware Options

&M page 5-25

S27,S30

Asynchronous dial / asynchronous data

&M1 S27 Asynchronous dial / synchronous data

&M2 S27 Dials stored number when DTR off / on transition is detected / sync data

&M3 S27 Manual dial / sync data

&M4 S30 V.25 bis autodialer with BISYNC protocol / sync data

&M5 S30 V.25 bis autodialer with SDLC protocol /sync data

&M6 S30 V.25 bis async dialer / sync data

&M7 -- V.25 bis async dialer / async data

&M8 page 5-25

-- V.25 bis async dialer / BISYNC protocol / sync data (EBCDIC)

&M9 -- V.25 bis async dialer / SDLC protocol/ sync data (EBCDIC, NRZ)

&M10 -- V.25 bis async dialer / SDLC protocol/ sync data (ASCII, NRZ1)

&M11 -- V.25 bis async dialer / sync data (EBCDIC, NRZ1)

&P page 5-26

S22 39/61 pulse make / break ratio

&P1 S22 33/67 pulse make / break ratio

&R page 5-21

S21 CTS normal operating state

&R1 S21 CTS forced on

&R2 S72 CTS follows DCD

&R9 S72 CTS equals RTS

&S page 5-20

S21 DSR always on

&S1 S21 DSR on when ready to accept data

&S2 S21 DSR off for 5 seconds after disconnect

&S3 S21 DSR follows off hook (OH)

&T page 7-2

-- Terminate current test †

Command Page S-Reg Description

† cannot be executed from remote configuration mode

Modem 3600 E-5

Page 214: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Hardware Options

&T1 page 7-3

-- Initiate analog loopback †

&T3 page 7-5

-- Initiate digital loopback †

&T4 page 7-6

S23 Grant remote commanded digital loopback †

&T5 S23 Denies remote commanded digital loopback †

&T6 -- Initiate remote digital loopback †

&T7 page 7-7

-- Initiate self test remote digital loopback †

&T8 page 7-4

-- Initiate self test analog loopback †

&V page 5-40

-- View configuration profiles

&V1 page 5-40

-- Display received signal status

&V2 -- Display active profile

&W page 5-38

-- Store current configuration to user option set #1

&W1 -- Store current configuration to user option set #2

&X page 5-27

S27 Internal clock

&X1 S27 External clock

&X2 S27 Receive clock

&Y page 5-38

-- Powerup with user option set #1

&Y1 -- Powerup with user option set #2

&Y? -- Display powerup option set

&Zn=x page 5-40

-- Store dial string x to location n (n=0-9)

Command Page S-Reg Description

† cannot be executed from remote configuration mode

E-6 Modem 3600

Page 215: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Hardware Options

%A page 6-6

S64 Disable auto-reliable fallback character

%An S64 Set auto-reliable fallback character to n (n = ASCII 1-127) †

%B page 5-28

S69 Use DTE speed/maximum DCE speed

%B1 S69 300 bps max

%B2 S69 1200 bps max

%B3 S69 2400 bps max

%B4 S69 4800 bps max

%B5 S69 9600 bps uncoded max

%B6 S69 9600 bps max

%B7 S69 7200 bps max

%B8 S69 12000 bps max

%B9 S69 14400 bps max

%B10 S69 600 bps

%B11 S69 16800 bps max

%B12 S69 19200 bps max

%B13 page 5-28

S69 21600 bps max

%B14 S69 24000 bps max

%B15 S69 26400 bps max

%B16 S69 28800 bps max

%B17 S69 31200 bps max

%B18 S69 33600 bps max

%C page 6-12

S56 Compression disabled

%C1 S56 Compression enabled on transmit and receive data

%C2 S56 Compression enabled on transmit data only

%C3 S56 Compression enabled on receive data only

Command Page S-Reg Description

† cannot be executed from remote configuration mode

Modem 3600 E-7

Page 216: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Hardware Options

%D page 6-4

S62 Disable disconnect buffer delay

%Dn S62 Set disconnect buffer delay in seconds n (n = 1-255)

%E page 5-30

S60 Disable auto retrain

%E1 S60 Enable auto retrain

%L page 5-29

S81 Disabled minimum DCE speed

%L1 S81 Disabled

%L2 S81 1200 bps min

%L3 S81 2400 bps min

%L4 S81 4800 bps min

%L5 S81 9600 bps uncoded min

%L6 S81 9600 bps min

%L7 S81 7200 bps min

%L8 S81 12000 bps min

%L9 S81 14400 bps min

%L10 S81 600 bps

%L11 S81 16800 bps min

%L12 S81 19200 bps min

%L13 S81 21600 bps min

%L14 page 5-29

S81 24000 bps min

%L15 S81 26400 bps min

%L16 S81 28800 bps min

%L17 S81 31200 bps min

%L18 S81 33600 bps min

%P1=pw page 5-41

-- Set software download password

%P1=D -- Disable software download

%P1? -- Display software download password

Command Page S-Reg Description

† cannot be executed from remote configuration mode

E-8 Modem 3600

Page 217: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Hardware Options

%R page 5-30

S53 Disable automatic rate adaption

%R1 S53 Enable automatic rate adaption low BER

%R2 S53 Enable automatic rate adaption medium BER

%R3 S53 Enable automatic rate adaption using high BER

%T page 7-7

-- Transmit test pattern †

%T= page 5-43

-- Followed by a remote configuration security code, establishes remote configuration †

%V page 5-31

-- Display product revision level

\A page 6-11

S63 Maximum block size of 64 characters

\A1 S63 Maximum block size of 128 characters

\A2 S63 Maximum block size of 192 characters

\A3 S63 Maximum block size of 256 characters

\B page 6-11

S79 Transmit a break signal

\Bn S79 Sets break length in 20 ms increments, n=1-255, default is 35 (700 ms)

\C page 6-11

S60 Disable auto-reliable buffer

\C1 S60 Buffer data for 4 seconds or 200 characters

\G page 6-8

S54 Disable modem port flow control

\G1 S54 Enable modem port XON/XOFF flow control

Command Page S-Reg Description

† cannot be executed from remote configuration mode

Modem 3600 E-9

Page 218: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Hardware Options

\J page 6-5

S72 Disable slaved DTE/DCE speed (constant speed DTE on)

\J1 S72 Enable slaved DTE/DCE speed (constant speed DTE off)

\J2 -- Enable 230.4 kbps DTE speed

\J3 -- Disable 230.4 kbps DTE speed

NoteThe 230.4 kbps DTE speed is available, but the DTE will not autobaud to 230.4 kbps. With the modem set for 115.2 kbps, enter AT\J2 to enable the speed, and reset the DTE for 230.4 kbps. When the modem is set for 230.4 kbps, enter AT\J3 to disable it if needed. Reset the DTE for 115.2 kbps.

\Kn page 6-9

S59 Selects action when encountering a break

\K S59 Break option 0

\K1 S59 Break option 1

\K2 S59 Break option 2

\K3 S59 Break option 3

\K4 S59 Break option 4

\K5 S59 Break option 5

\M page 6-5

S70 V.42 fast detect data sequence disabled

\M1 S70 V.42 fast detect data sequence enabled

\N page 6-6

S70 Normal mode

\N1 S70 Direct mode

\N2 page 6-6

S70 MNP only

\N3 S70 MNP or normal

\N4 S70 LAPM only

\N5 S70 LAPM with normal fallback

\N6 S70 LAPM with MNP fallback

\N7 S70 LAPM with MNP and normal fallback

Command Page S-Reg Description

† cannot be executed from remote configuration mode

E-10 Modem 3600

Page 219: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Hardware Options

\Q page 6-7

S54 Disable DTE flow control

\Q1 S54 Enable DTE XON/XOFF flowcontrol

\Q2 S54 Enable CTS flow control to the DTE

\Q3 S54 Enables bilateral CTS/RTS flow control

\Q4 S54 Disable DCE flow control

\Q5 S54 Enable DCE XON/XOFF flowcontrol

\Q6 S54 Enable CTS flow control to the DTE

\Q7 S54 Enable CTS flow control to the DTE

\R page 5-21

S60 Ring indicate, blinks for ring and remains on for duration of call

\R1 S60 Ring indicate, blinks for ring and turns off when call is answered

\T page 6-10

S58 Disable inactivity timer

\Tn S58 Set inactivity timer to n (n = 1-255 minutes)

\V page 5-6

S60 Disable protocol result codes

\V1 S60 Enable protocol result codes

\X page 6-8

S54 No XON/XOFF characters to remote DCE

\X1 S54 Pass XON/XOFF characters to remote DCE

*AS page 5-27

-- Disable V.34 asymmetric bit rate

*AS1 -- Enable V.34 asymmetric bit rate

*AUn page 5-16

-- Dial number stored at location n upon transition of DTR in command mode (n = 1-9)

*CNx,n page 5-40

-- Store phone number n in location x (x = 1-9)

Command Page S-Reg Description

† cannot be executed from remote configuration mode

Modem 3600 E-11

Page 220: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Hardware Options

*DA page 5-32

-- Switches modem to talk mode †

*DA1 -- Switches modem to data mode †

*DB page 5-36

S32 Manual dial backup operation

*DB1 S32 Automatic dial backup operation

*DG page 7-7

S34 Disables bilateral digital loop

*DG1 S34 Enables bilateral digital loop

*FB page 5-22

S29 Ignore pin 23

*FB1 S29 Pin 23 transition causes DTE speed fallback

*FT page 5-32

S29 Disable fast train

*FT1 S29 Enable fast train

*IC -- Disregard incoming call

*LA page 7-8

S34 Ignore pin 18

*LA1 S34 DTE commanded LAL enabled

*LB page 5-36

-- Return to leased line from dial backup†

*LC page 5-32

S32 Line current disconnect disabled

*LC1 S32 Short (8 ms) line current disconnect

*LC2 S32 Long (90 ms) line current disconnect

*LD page 5-36

-- Manual dial backup

*MM page 5-27

-- Automode (modulation)

*MM1 -- V.21

*MM2 -- Bell 103J

*MM3 -- Reserved

*MM4 -- Bell 212A

*MM5 -- V.22 bis

*MM6 -- V.27 bis 4-wire leased only

Command Page S-Reg Description

† cannot be executed from remote configuration mode

E-12 Modem 3600

Page 221: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Hardware Options

*MM7 page 5-27

-- Reserved

*MM8 -- V.29 4-wire leased only

*MM9 -- Reserved

*MM10 -- V.33 4-wire leased only

*MM11 -- V.32 bis

*MM12 -- V.34

*ND page 5-40

-- Displays the nine stored numbers

*NT page 5-33

S29 AT command set disabled

*NT1 S29 AT command set enabled

*OR page 5-36

S14 Originate

*OR1 S14 Forced answer

*RC page 5-8

S57 15 - 4800 bps, 18 - 9600 bps

*RC1 S57 11 - 4800 bps, 12 - 9600 bps

*RD page 7-8

S34 Ignore pin 21

*RD1 S34 DTE commanded RDL enabled

*RO page 5-41

S29 Retain options at disconnect

*RO1 S29 Restore options at disconnect

*RR page 5-31

-- Rate negotiate to 2400 †

*RR1 -- Rate negotiate to 4800 †

*RR2 -- Rate negotiate to 7200 †

*RR3 -- Rate negotiate to 9600 †

*RR4 -- Rate negotiate to 12000 †

*RR5 -- Rate negotiate to 14400 †

*RR6 -- Rate negotiate to 16800 †

*RR7 -- Rate negotiate to 19200 †

*RR8 -- Rate negotiate to 21600 †

*RR9 -- Rate negotiate to 24000 †

*RR10 -- Rate negotiate to 26400 †

*RR11 -- Rate negotiate to 28800 †

*RR12 -- Rate negotiate to 31200 †

Command Page S-Reg Description

† cannot be executed from remote configuration mode

Modem 3600 E-13

Page 222: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Hardware Options

*RR13 page 5-31

-- Rate negotiate to 33600 †

*TDn page 5-33

S51 Sets dial transmit level -10 to -30 dBm

*TH page 5-27

S97 Low V.34 rate selection threshold (10-6 BER)

*TH1 S97 Medium V.34 rate selection threshold (10-4 BER)

*TH2 S97 High rate selection threshold (10-2 BER)

*TLn page 5-36

S52 Sets leased line transmit level to n where n is a number between 0 and 30 corresponding to 0 to -30 db †

$H page 5-32

-- Online quick reference

$H=string

-- Online quick reference for string

$V -- Display product serial number

$Y page 5-41

-- Enable soft download flash

Command Page S-Reg Description

† cannot be executed from remote configuration mode

E-14 Modem 3600

Page 223: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Hardware Options

Caller ID Commands

Distinctive Ring Commands

Fax Commands

Class 1 Commands Valid in Only Fax Mode

Command Page S-Reg Description

*ID page 5-17

-- Disable Caller ID

*ID1 -- Enable Caller ID

Command Page S-Reg Description

*DR page 5-18

S53 Disable Distinctive Ring

*DR=1 S53 Enable Distinctive Ring

Fax Command Page Description

+FCLASS=0 page 9-6

Service Class 0 (data modem) †

+FCLASS=1 Service Class 1 (fax modem) †

+FCLASS? Display current Service Class settin g †

+FCLASS=? Display available Service Class settings †

+FAA= page 9-10

Enables fax auto answer function

*FR Fax auto answer DTE autobaud forced to >=19200

*FR1 Fax auto answer DTE autobaud forced to =19200

*FR? Display option status

* Cannot executed from remote configuration

Command Page Description

+FTH=(MOD) page9-9

Transmit HDLC data with (MOD) carrier *

+FRH=(MOD) page9-9

Receive HDLC data with (MOD) carrier *

+FRM=(MOD) page9-8

Receive data with (MOD) carrier *

+FRS=(Time) page9-7

Waits for silence (10 ms intervals, 0-255) *

Modem 3600 E-15

Page 224: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Hardware Options

+FTM=(MOD) page9-8

Transmit data with (MOD) carrier *

+FTS=(Time) page9-6

Stop transmission and pause (10 ms intervals, 0-255) *

* cannot be executed from remote configuration

NOTE: The (MOD) parameter can be one of the following values: 0 or

ValueModulationSpeed

3V.21 channel 300 bps

24V.27 ter2400 bps

38V.27 ter4800 bps

72V.297200 bps

73V.177200 bps

74V.177200 bps with short train

96V.299600 bps

97V.179600 bps

98V.179600 bps with short train

121V.1712000 bps

122V.1712000 bps with short train

145V.1714400 bps

146V.1714400 bps with short train

+FTx=? page9-9

Check range for values supported where x may be M, S, or H. If x is M or H, the modem returns 3, 24, 48, 72, 73, 96, 97, 98, 121, 122, 145, 146. If x is S, the modem returns 0-255.

+FRx=?

+FCERROR Carrier different from specified in +FRM or +FRH

Command Page Description

E-16 Modem 3600

Page 225: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Hardware Options

Security CommandsCommand Page Description

Low Security

$S=x page 8-4

Sets an empty password location to x

$C=x,y Changes either password where x represents the old password and y is the new one

$C=x,- Deletes password x from memory

$DR Reset security

$D=x Disables security where x is either password

$D? or $E? Displays the current status of security

$E=x Enables security where x is either password

High Security

$Cn=m page 8-8

Set user callback number. n = user number and m = the callback number

$D page 8-7

Disable security

$E? or $D? page 8-10

Display current security status

$EH=pw page 8-7

Enable security (pw = superuser password) †

$F=pw$pw

page 8-10

Reinitialize security

$IBn page 8-11

Display user information for a block of up to ten valid users (n = first user number)

$In Display user information (n = user number)

$Ln=m page 8-8

Set security level for the user specified by n (m = security level)

$M Display illegal attempts information

$M* Reset illegal attempts registers/restore suspended users to normal status

$Mn Reset illegal attempts registers and restore suspended user n to normal status

†cannot be executed from remote configuration mode

Modem 3600 E-17

Page 226: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Hardware Options

$Pn=pw$pw

page 8-8

Set user password; n = user number and new password (n = 0 for superuser pw = password)

$Rn page 8-10

Remove a user (n = user number)

$S? page 8-10

Display current user status (superuser / user)

$W0 page 8-9

Disable user changes (password and callback number) †

$W1 Enable user changes (password and callback number) †

$W2 Enable remote superuser †

$W? Display user changes remote superuser option status

$$ page 8-11

Local logoff

$n=pw page 8-11page 8-11

Local logon (n = user number and pw = password)

$S=pw page 8-11

Request to enter superuser status (pw = password)

†cannot be executed from remote configuration mode

E-18 Modem 3600

Page 227: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Hardware Options

Remote Configuration Commands Command Page Description

%P=n page5-42

Set remote configuration security code to value n (0 to 99999999)

%P? Display local modem remote configuration security code

%P=(blank)

Clear security code

*RA page5-44

Disable remote configuration

*RA1 Enable remote configuration

*RB Remote configuration DTE speed = 300 bps

*RB1 Remote configuration DTE speed = 600 bps

*RB2 Remote configuration DTE speed = 1200 bps

*RB3 Remote configuration DTE speed = 2400 bps

*RB4 Remote configuration DTE speed = 4800 bps

*RB5 Remote configuration DTE speed = 7200 bps

*RB6 Remote configuration DTE speed = 9600 bps

*RB7 page5-44

Remote configuration DTE speed = 12000 bps

*RB8 Remote configuration DTE speed = 14400 bps

*RB9 Remote configuration DTE speed = 16800 bps

*RB10 Remote configuration DTE speed = 19200 bps

*RB11 Remote configuration DTE speed = 21600 bps

*RB12 Remote configuration DTE speed = 24000 bps

*RB13 Remote configuration DTE speed = 26400 bps

*RB14 Remote configuration DTE speed = 28800 bps

*RB15 Remote configuration DTE speed = 28400 bps

*RB16 Remote configuration DTE speed = 57600 bps

*RB17 Remote configuration DTE speed = 115200 bps

Modem 3600 E-19

Page 228: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Hardware Options

*RF page5-44

7 data bits, mark parity, 1 stop bit

*RF1 7 data bits, no parity, 2 stop bits

*RF2 7 data bits, odd parity, 1 stop bit

*RF3 7 data bits, even parity, 1 stop bit

*RF4 8 data bits, mark parity, 1 stop bit

*RF5 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit

*RF6 8 data bits, odd parity, 1 stop bit

*RF7 8 data bits, even parity, 1 stop bit

*RQ page5-45

Exit remote configuration, save new configuration

*RQ1 Exit remote configuration, discard new configuration

Command Page Description

E-20 Modem 3600

Page 229: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Hardware Options

Status Registers

S-Reg RO/RW Page Function

DefaultFactory Set #1

S0 RW page 10-4

Ring to answer 1

S1 RO Ring count 0

S2 RW Escape sequence character 43 (+)

S3 RW End-of-line character 13 (CR)

S4 RW Line-feed character 10 (LF)

S5 RW page 10-5

Backspace character 8 (BS)

S6 RW Pause before blind dialing 2 (2 sec)

S7 RW Pause for carrier 30 (30 sec)

S8 RW Pause for comma 2 (2 sec)

S9 RW Carrier validation 6 (0.6 sec)

S10 RW Loss carrier delay time 14 (1.4 sec)

S11 RO page 10-6

DTMF tone duration 80 ms

S12 RW Escape sequence pause 50 (1 sec)

S14 RW page 10-7

Bit mapped 8A hex

S16 RO page 10-8

System tests 0

S18 RW Test timer 0

S21 RW page 10-9

Bit mapped B4 hex

S22 RW page 10-10

Bit mapped 46 hex

S23 RW Bit mapped 01 hex

S25 RW page 10-11

DTR recognition time 5 (0.5 sec)

S26 RW RTS/CTS delay 0

S27 RW Bit mapped 0

S28 RW Lookback timer 15 min

S29 RW page 10-12

Bit mapped 0

S30 RW V.25 mode selection 0

RO=Read only RW=Read or write

Modem 3600 E-21

Page 230: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Hardware Options

S32 RW page 10-13

Bit mapped 06 hex

S34 RW Bit mapped 60 hex

S35 RW Default dial number 1

S41 RW page 10-13

Remote configuration escape character

3d hex

S42 RW Remote configuration guard time

32 hex

S44 RW DTE XON character 11 hex

S45 RW DTE XOFF character 13 hex

S49 RW DCE XON character 11 hex

S50 RW DCE XOFF character 13 hex

S51 RW Dial transmit level 10

S52 RW page 10-15

Lease transmit level 0

S53 RW Bit mapped 0

S54 RW page 10-16

Bit mapped 63 hex

S56 RW page 10-17

V.42 compression 03 hex

S57 RW Bit mapped 0

S58 RW Inactivity timer 0

S59 RW page 10-18

MNP break control 5

S60 RW Bit mapped 5b hex

S61 RO page 10-19

DTE word length, parity 18 hex

S62 RW Disconnect buffer delay 0

S63 RW Maximum protocol block size 255

S64 RW page 10-20

Auto-reliable character 0

S67 RO Link speed status 0

S69 RW page 10-22

Maximum DCE speed 18

S-Reg RO/RW Page Function

DefaultFactory Set #1

RO=Read only RW=Read or write

E-22 Modem 3600

Page 231: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Hardware Options

S70 RW page 10-23

Protocol operating mode 0f hex

S71 RO Protocol operating mode status

0

S72 RW page 10-24

Bit mapped 0

S73 RW Password timeout security 0

S74 RW Callback delay 15

S75 RW Callback retry 0

S76 RW page 10-25

Callback retry delay 15

S77 RW Lockout threshold 0

S78 RW Autocallback timer 30

S79 RW Break length 35

S80 RO page 10-26

Serial port speed 20

S81 RW page 10-27

Minimum DCE rate 1

S82 RW Bit mapped 0 hex

S84 RO page 10-28

Negotiation status 0

S88 RW Modulation type 0

S91 RW page 10-29

Current modulation 0

S95 RW V.34 settings f3 hex

S96 RW page 10-30

V.34 settings a0 hex

S97 RW Bit mapped 06 hex

S-Reg RO/RW Page Function

DefaultFactory Set #1

RO=Read only RW=Read or write

Modem 3600 E-23

Page 232: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Hardware Options

V.25 bis Dialer Commands

Synchronous Command Page Description

CIC page11-8

Connect incoming call command

CRN nn...n page11-5

Dial command (nn...n = number to be dialed)

0 - 9 DTMF and pulse digit

* # DTMF digit

W Wait for second type of dial tone

> Pause for 1 second

= Pause for 3 seconds

< Pause for programmed delay time

P Pulse dial

T Tone dial

& Flash (go on hook) for 1/2 second

; Parameter separator

Space, dash, parenthesis, period

page11-4

Clarity characters

CRRn page11-8

Redial the last number a maximum of n times

CRSa page11-6

Dial stored number command (a = address)

DIC page11-7

Disregard incoming call command

PRK page11-12

Save current option settings

PRLa;b page11-8

Link number at address a with number at address b

PRNa; nn...n page11-5

Program number command (nn...n = number to be dialed, a = address)

PROxxx;yy;0;0...

page11-10

Program options command (xxx = register address, yy = option count)

E-24 Modem 3600

Page 233: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Hardware Options

PRPn page11-12

Restores current option settings to the factory defaults in default bank n (1-9)

RLL page11-9

Request list of linked numbers command

RLN page11-7

Request list of stored numbers command

RLOxxx;yy page11-13

Request list of stored options command (xxx = register address, yy = option count)

RLV page11-10

Request list of version information command

Synchronous Command Page Description

Modem 3600 E-25

Page 234: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Hardware Options

V.25 Response MessagesResponse Message Meaning

CFIAB Call failure - answer back tone but no connection

CFIDT Call failure - no dial tone

CFIET Call failure - reorder or busy

CFILD Call failure - link list complete

CFINS Call failure - number not stored

CFINT Call failure - no answer back tone, no ringback

CFIRT Call failure - timeout occurred

CNX @ 33600 bps Intermediate call progress - connection made at 33600

CNX @ 31200 bps Intermediate call progress - connection made at 31200

CNX @ 28800 bps Intermediate call progress - connection made at 28800

CNX @ 26400 bps Intermediate call progress - connection made at 26400

CNX @ 24000 bps Intermediate call progress - connection made at 24000

CNX @ 21600 bps Intermediate call progress - connection made at 21600

CNX @ 19200 bps Intermediate call progress - connection made at 19200

CNX @ 16800 bps Intermediate call progress - connection made at 16800

CNX @ 14400 bps Intermediate call progress - connection made at 14400

CNX @ 12000 bps Intermediate call progress - connection made at 12000

CNX @ 9600 bps Intermediate call progress - connection made at 9600

E-26 Modem 3600

Page 235: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Hardware Options

CNX @ 7200 bps Intermediate call progress - connection made at 7200

CNX @ 4800 bps Intermediate call progress - connection made at 4800

CNX @ 2400 bps Intermediate call progress - connection made at 2400

CNX @ 1200 bps Intermediate call progress - connection made at 1200

INC Incoming ring detected

INVCU Invalid command - command unknown

INVMS Invalid command - message syntax error

INVPS Invalid command - parameter syntax error

INVPV Invalid command - parameter value error

VAL Valid command received

Response Message Meaning

Modem 3600 E-27

Page 236: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Hardware Options

Factory Option Sets

Factory Option Set #1(Asynchronous Dial-up with V.42 bis Protocol) (AT&F or AT&F1)

MODEM OPTIONS TEST OPTIONS DCE rate - 33600 Bilateral digital loop disabledModulation automode DTE local test disabledV.34 rate threshold high DTE remote test disabledV.34 asymmetric rate enabled Remote commanded test enabledNormal originate Test timeout offFast train disabled Auto retrain enabled DIAL LINE OPTIONSSQ auto rate disabled Tone dialTransmit clock internal Auto dial #1Dial line Wait for dial toneJack type RJ11 Wait delay 2 secondsLine current disconnect long Pause delay 2 secondsLong space disconnect enabled Call timeout 30 secondsV.22 guard tone disabled Answer on 1 ring

Autocallback disabled

PROTOCOL OPTIONS DTE OPTIONSLAPM protocol enabled Async dataMNP protocol enabled DTE rate - 115200Protocol fallback enabled 8 bit, no parityData compression normal Async controlled dialerConstant DTE speed AT command set enabledDTE flow control RTS DTR disconnectsDCE flow control CTS DSR forced highXON/XOFF pass through disabled DCD normalInactivity timer off CTS forced highBreak control 5 DTE fallback disabledV.42 fast detect enabled Options retained at disconnect

SPEAKER OPTIONSVolume lowOn until carrier detect

E-28 Modem 3600

Page 237: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Hardware Options

Factory Option Set # 2(Asynchronous Dial-up without V.42 bis Protocol) (AT&F2)

MODEM OPTIONS TEST OPTIONS DCE rate - 33600 Bilateral digital loop disabledModulation automode DTE local test disabledV.34 rate threshold low * DTE remote test disabledV.34 asymmetric rate enabled Remote commanded test enabledNormal originate Test timeout offFast train disabled Auto retrain enabled DIAL LINE OPTIONSSQ auto rate disabled Tone dialTransmit clock internal Auto dial #1Dial line Wait for dial toneJack type RJ11 Wait delay 2 secondsLine current disconnect long Pause delay 2 secondsLong space disconnect enabled Call timeout 30 secondsV.22 guard tone disabled Answer on 1 ring

Autocallback disabled

PROTOCOL OPTIONS DTE OPTIONSLAPM protocol disabled * Async dataMNP protocol disabled * DTE rate - 115200Normal buffer mode * 8 bit, no parityConstant DTE speed Async controlled dialerDTE flow control disabled * AT command set enabledDCE flow control disabled * DTR disconnectsXON/XOFF pass through disabled *DSR forced highInactivity timer off DCD normalBreak control 0 * CTS forced highV.42 fast detect disabled * DTE fallback disabled

Options retained at disconnect

SPEAKER OPTIONSVolume lowOn until carrier detect

*Indicates variation from factory option set #1

Modem 3600 E-29

Page 238: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Hardware Options

Factory Option Set #3(Synchronous Dial-up) (AT&F3)

MODEM OPTIONS TEST OPTIONS DCE rate - 33600 Bilateral digital loop disabledModulation automode DTE local test disabledV.34 rate threshold low * DTE remote test disabledV.34 asymmetric rate disabled * Remote commanded test enabledNormal originate Test timeout offFast train disabled Auto retrain enabled DIAL LINE OPTIONSSQ auto rate disabled Tone dialTransmit clock internal Auto dial #1Dial line Wait for dial toneJack type RJ11 Wait delay 2 secondsLine current disconnect long Pause delay 2 secondsLong space disconnect disabled * Call timeout 30 secondsV.22 guard tone disabled Answer on 1 ring

Autocallback disabled

PROTOCOL OPTIONS DTE OPTIONSLAPM protocol disabled * Sync data *MNP protocol disabled * Dial method manual *Direct buffer mode * AT command set disabled *DTE flow control disabled * DTR disconnects *DCE flow control disabled * DSR normal *XON/XOFF pass through disabled DCD normalInactivity timer off CTS follows RTS *Break control 0 * RTS/CTS delay 0 ms *V.42 fast detect disabled * DTE fallback disabled Options retained at disconnect

SPEAKER OPTIONSVolume lowOn until carrier detect

*Indicates variation from factory option set #1

E-30 Modem 3600

Page 239: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Hardware Options

Factory Option Set # 4(Synchronous 4-wire Leased Line) (AT&F4)

MODEM OPTIONS TEST OPTIONS DCE rate - 33600 Bilateral digital loop enabled *V.34 modulation * DTE local test disabledV.34 rate threshold low * DTE remote test disabledV.34 asymmetric rate disabled * Remote commanded test enabledNormal originate Test timeout offFast train disabled Auto retrain enabled DIAL LINE OPTIONSSQ auto rate disabled Tone dialTransmit clock internal Auto dial #1Leased line * Wait for dial tone4-wire * Wait delay 2 secondsTransmit level - 0 dBm * Pause delay 2 secondsDial backup manual * Call timeout 60 seconds *Lookback timer - 15 min * Answer on 1 ringJack type RJ11 Autocallback disabledLine current disconnect longLong space disconnect enabled DTE OPTIONSV.22 guard tone disabled Sync data *

AT command set disabled *PROTOCOL OPTIONS Ignores DTR *LAPM protocol disabled * DSR normal *MNP protocol disabled * DCD normalDirect buffer mode * CTS follows RTS *DTE flow control disabled * RTS/CTS delay 0 ms *DCE flow control disabled * DTE fallback disabledXON/XOFF pass through disabled Options retained at disconnectInactivity timer off Break control 0 *V.42 fast detect disabled *

SPEAKER OPTIONSVolume lowOn until carrier detect

*Indicates variation from factory option set #1

Modem 3600 E-31

Page 240: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Hardware Options

Factory Option Set #5(Asynchronous 4-wire Leased Line with V.42bis Protocol)(AT&F5)

MODEM OPTIONS TEST OPTIONS DCE rate - 33600 Bilateral digital loop disabledV.34 modulation * DTE local test disabledV.34 rate threshold high DTE remote test disabledV.34 asymmetric rate enabled Remote commanded test enabledNormal originate Test timeout offFast train disabled Auto retrain enabled DIAL LINE OPTIONSSQ auto rate disabled Tone dialTransmit clock internal Auto dial #1Leased line, 4-wire * Wait for dial toneTransmit level - 0 dBm * Wait delay 2 secondsDial backup manual * Pause delay 2 secondsLookback timer - 15 min * Call timeout 30 secondsJack type RJ11 Answer on 1 ringLine current disconnect long Autocallback disabledLong space disconnect enabled V.22 guard tone disabled DTE OPTIONS

Async dataPROTOCOL OPTIONS DTE rate - 115200LAPM protocol enabled 8 bit, no parityMNP protocol disabled * AT command set enabledProtocol fallback disabled * Ignores DTR *Data compression normal DSR forced highConstant DTE speed DCD normalDTE flow control RTS CTS forced highDCE flow control CTS DTE fallback disabledXON/XOFF pass through disabled Options retained at disconnectInactivity timer off Break control 5 V.42 fast detect enabled

SPEAKER OPTIONSVolume lowOn until carrier detect

*Indicates variation from factory option set #1

E-32 Modem 3600

Page 241: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Hardware Options

Factory Option Set # 6(Asynchronous 4-wire Leased Line without V.42bis Protocol) (AT&F6)

MODEM OPTIONS TEST OPTIONS DCE rate - 33600 Bilateral digital loop disabledV.34 modulation * DTE local test disabledV.34 rate threshold low * DTE remote test disabledV.34 asymmetric rate enabled Remote commanded test enabledNormal originate Test timeout offFast train disabled Auto retrain enabled DIAL LINE OPTIONSSQ auto rate disabled Tone dialTransmit clock internal Auto dial #1Leased line, 4-wire * Wait for dial toneTransmit level - 0 dBm * Wait delay 2 secondsDial backup manual * Pause delay 2 secondsLookback timer - 15 min * Call timeout 30 secondsJack type RJ11 Answer on 1 ringLine current disconnect long Autocallback disabledLong space disconnect enabled V.22 guard tone disabled DTE OPTIONS

Async dataPROTOCOL OPTIONS DTE rate - 115200LAPM protocol disabled * 8 bit, no parityMNP protocol disabled * AT command set enabledNormal buffer mode Ignores DTR *Constant DTE speed DSR forced highDTE flow control disabled * DCD normalDCE flow control disabled * CTS forced highXON/XOFF pass through disabled DTE fallback disabledInactivity timer off Options retained at disconnectBreak control 0 *V.42 fast detect disabled *

SPEAKER OPTIONSVolume lowOn until carrier detect

*Indicates variation from factory option set #1

Modem 3600 E-33

Page 242: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Hardware Options

Factory Option Set # 7 (Synchronous 2-wire Leased Line Normal Originate) (AT&F7)

MODEM OPTIONS TEST OPTIONS DCE rate - 33600 Bilateral digital loop enabledV.34 modulation * DTE local test disabledV.34 rate threshold low * DTE remote test disabledV.34 asymmetric rate disabled * Remote commanded test enabledNormal originate Test timeout offFast train disabled Auto retrain enabled DIAL LINE OPTIONSSQ auto rate disabled Tone dialTransmit clock internal Auto dial #1Leased line, 2-wire * Wait for dial toneTransmit level - 0 dBm * Wait delay 2 secondsDial backup manual * Pause delay 2 secondsLookback timer - 15 min * Call timeout 30 secondsJack type RJ11 Answer on 1 ringLine current disconnect long Autocallback disabledLong space disconnect disabled *V.22 guard tone disabled DTE OPTIONS

Sync data *PROTOCOL OPTIONS AT command set disabled *LAPM protocol disabled * Ignores DTR *MNP protocol disabled * DSR normal *Direct buffer mode * DCD normalDTE flow control disabled * CTS follows RTS *DCE flow control disabled * RTS/CTS delay 0 ms *XON/XOFF pass through disabled DTE fallback disabledInactivity timer off Options retained at disconnectBreak control 0 *V.42 fast detect disabled *

SPEAKER OPTIONSVolume lowOn until carrier detect

*Indicates variation from factory option set #1

E-34 Modem 3600

Page 243: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Hardware Options

Factory Option Set # 8 (Synchronous 2-wire Leased Line Forced Answer) (AT&F8)

MODEM OPTIONS TEST OPTIONS DCE rate - 33600 Bilateral digital loop enabled *V.34 modulation * DTE local test disabledV.34 rate threshold low * DTE remote test disabledV.34 asymmetric rate disabled * Remote commanded test enabledForced answer * Test timeout offFast train disabled Auto retrain enabled DIAL LINE OPTIONSSQ auto rate disabled Tone dialTransmit clock internal Auto dial #1Leased line, 2-wire * Wait for dial toneTransmit level - 0 dBm* Wait delay 2 secondsDial backup manual * Pause delay 2 secondsLookback timer - 15 min * Call timeout 30 seconds *Jack type RJ11 Answer on 1 ringLine current disconnect long Autocallback disabledLong space disconnect enabled V.22 guard tone disabled DTE OPTIONS

Sync data *PROTOCOL OPTIONS AT command set disabled *LAPM protocol disabled * Ignores DTR *MNP protocol disabled * DSR normal *Direct mode * DCD normalDTE flow control disabled * CTS follows RTS *DCE flow control disabled * RTS/CST delay 0 ms *XON/XOFF pass through disabled DTE fallback disabledInactivity timer off Options retained at disconnectBreak control 0 * V.42 fast detect disabled *

SPEAKER OPTIONSVolume lowOn until carrier detect

*Indicates variation from factory option set #1

Modem 3600 E-35

Page 244: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Hardware Options

Factory Option Set #9 (Synchronous V.25bis Dialer) (AT&F9)

MODEM OPTIONS TEST OPTIONS DCE rate - 33600 Bilateral digital loop disabledModulation automode DTE local test disabledV.34 rate threshold low * DTE remote test disabledV.34 asymmetric rate disabled * Remote commanded test enabledNormal originate Test timeout offFast train disabled Auto retrain enabled DIAL LINE OPTIONSSQ auto rate disabled Tone dialTransmit clock internal Auto dial #1Dial line Wait for dial toneJack type RJ11 Wait delay 2 secondsLine current disconnect long Pause delay 2 secondsLong space disconnect disabled Call timeout 30 secondsV.22 guard tone disabled Answer on 1 ring

Autocallback disabledPROTOCOL OPTIONSLAPM protocol disabled * DTE OPTIONSMNP protocol disabled * Sync data *Direct mode * V.25 SDLC dialer *DTE flow control disabled * Character type ASCIIDCE flow control disabled * SDLC data format NRZ *XON/XOFF pass through disabled DTR disconnect *Inactivity timer off DSR normal *Break control 0 * DCD normal *V.42 fast detect disabled * CTS follows RTS *

RTS/CTS delay 0 ms *DTE fallback disabled

SPEAKER OPTIONS Options retained at disconnectVolume lowOn until carrier detect

*Indicates variation from factory option set #1

E-36 Modem 3600

Page 245: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Appendix FASCII and EBCDIC Characters

Hexadecimal equivalents of binary and decimal numbers are as follows.

Hexadecimal Examples:

Binary Decimal Hexadecimal

0000 0 0

0001 1 1

0010 2 2

0011 3 3

0100 4 4

0101 5 5

0110 6 6

0111 7 7

1000 8 8

1001 9 9

1010 10 A

1011 11 B

1100 12 C

1101 13 D

1110 14 E

1111 15 F

010110011110

101111010010

=5B hex=9D hex=E2 hex

Modem 3600 F-1

Page 246: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Hardware Options

The following table lists ASCII decimal, hexadecimal, and equivalent character values, and EBCDIC characters. The table shows only available keyboard symbols. Control keys are shown in the right column of the first table.

ASCII Symbol

Decimal Hex EBCDIC Control Key

(NUL) 0 00 NU (null) @

(SOH) 1 01 SH (start of header) A

(STX) 2 02 SX (start of text) B

(ETX) 3 03 EX (end of text) C

(EOT) 4 04 PF D

(ENQ) 5 05 HT (horizontal tab) E

(ACK) 6 06 LC (lower case) F

(BEL) 7 07 delete G

(BS) 8 08 -- H

(HT) 9 09 -- I

(LF) 10 0A (SMM) J

(VT) 11 0B VT (vertical tab) K

(FF) 12 0C FF (form feed) L

(CR) 13 0D CR (carriage return) M

(SO) 14 0E SO (shift out) N

(SI) 15 0F SI (shift in) O

(DLE) 16 10 DL (data link escape) P

(DC1) 17 11 D1 (device control 1) Q

(DC2) 18 12 D2 (device control 2) R

(DC3) 19 13 D3 (device control 3) S

(DC4) 20 14 RE (restore) T

(NAK) 21 15 NL (new line) U

(SYN) 22 16 BS (back space) V

(ETB) 23 17 IL (light) W

(CAN) 24 18 CN (cancel) X

(EM) 25 29 EM (end of message) Y

(SUB) 26 1A CC Z

F-2 Modem 3600

Page 247: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Hardware Options

(ESC) 27 1B C1 (CU1) [

(FS) 28 1C FS (form separator) \

(GS) 29 1D GS (group separator) ]

(RS) 30 1E RS (record separator) ^

(US) 31 1F US (unit separator) DEL

(SP) 32 20 DS --

! 33 21 SS (SOS) --

" 34 22 -- --

# 35 23 -- --

ASCII Symbol

Decimal Hex EBCDIC

$ 36 24 CP (bypass)

% 37 25 LF (line feed)

& 38 26 EB (end of block)

' 39 27 EC (escape)

( 40 28 --

) 41 29 --

* 42 2A SM

+ 43 2B C2 (CU2)

, 44 2C --

- 45 2D EQ (enquiry)

. 46 2E AK (acknowledgment)

/ 47 2F BL (bell)

0 48 30 --

1 49 31 --

2 50 32 SY (sync)

3 51 33 --

4 52 34 PN

5 53 35 --

6 54 36 UC (uppercase)

ASCII Symbol

Decimal Hex EBCDIC Control Key

Modem 3600 F-3

Page 248: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Hardware Options

7 55 37 ET (end of transmission)

8 56 38 --

9 57 39 --

: 58 3A --

; 59 3B C3 (CU3)

< 60 3C D4 (device control 4)

= 61 3D NK (no acknowledgment)

> 62 3E --

? 63 3F SB (substitute)

@ 64 40 space

A 65 41 --

B 66 42 --

C 67 43 --

D 68 44 --

E 69 45 --

F 70 46 --

G 71 47 --

H 72 48 --

I 73 49 ¢ (cent)

J 74 4A . (period)

K 75 4B < (less than)

L 76 4C ( (open parenthesis)

M 77 4D + (plus)

N 78 4E --

O 79 4F & (ampersand)

P 80 50 --

Q 81 51 --

R 82 52 --

S 83 53 --

T 84 54 (leading pad)

U 85 55 --

ASCII Symbol

Decimal Hex EBCDIC

F-4 Modem 3600

Page 249: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Hardware Options

V 86 56 --

W 87 57 --

X 88 58 --

Y 89 59 ! (exclamation)

Z 90 5A $ (dollar sign)

[ 91 5B * (asterisk)

\ 92 5C ) (close parenthesis)

] 93 5D ; (semicolon)

^ 94 5E ^ (caret or ¬)

_ 95 5F --

` 96 60 / (ACK1)

a 97 61 --

b 98 62 --

c 99 63 --

d 100 64 --

e 101 65 --

f 102 66 --

g 103 67 --

h 104 68 --

i 105 69 --

j 106 6A |

k 107 6B ,

l 108 6C %

m 109 6D _

n 110 6E >

o 111 6F ?

p 112 70 ACK0

q 113 71 --

r 114 72 --

s 115 73 --

t 116 74 --

ASCII Symbol

Decimal Hex EBCDIC

Modem 3600 F-5

Page 250: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Hardware Options

u 117 75 --

v 118 76 --

w 119 77 --

x 120 78 --

y 121 79 ` (single quote)

z 122 7A : (colon)

{ 123 7B # (pound)

| 124 7C @ (at)

} 125 7D ' (apostrophe)

~ 126 7E = (equal)

DEL 127 7F " (double quote)

-- 128 80 --

-- 129 81 a

-- 130 82 b

-- 131 83 c

-- 132 84 d

-- 133 85 e

-- 134 86 f

-- 135 87 g

-- 136 88 h

-- 137 89 i

-- 138 8A --

-- 139 8B --

-- 140 8C ≤ (less than or equal)

-- 141 8D (

-- 142 8E +

-- 143 8F --

-- 144 90 --

-- 145 91 j

ASCII Symbol

Decimal Hex EBCDIC

F-6 Modem 3600

Page 251: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Hardware Options

Decimal Hex EBCDIC

146

147 93 l

148 94 m

149 95 n

150 96 o

151 97 p

152 98 q

153 99 r

154 9A --

155 9B --

156 9C x

157 9D )

158 9E ±

159 9F --

160 A0 --

161 A1 ~

162 A2 s

163 A3 t

164 A4 u

165 A5 v

166 A6 w

167 A7 x

168 A8 y

169 A9 z

170 AA --

171 AB Î

172 AC È

173 AD [

174 AE Š

175 AF •

Modem 3600 F-7

Page 252: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Hardware Options

176 B0 S0 (SM0)

177 B1 S1 (SM1)

178 B2 S2 (SM2)

179 B3 S3 (SM3)

180 B4 S4 (SM4)

181 B5 S5 (SM5)

182 B6 S6 (SM6)

183 B7 S7 (SM7)

184 B8

185 B9 S9 (SM9)

186 BA --

187 BB °

188 BC

189 BD ] (close bracket)

190 BE ≠ (not equal)

191 BF --

192 C0 { (open brace)

193 C1 A

194 C2 B

195 C3 C

196 C4 D

197 C5 E

198 C6 F

199 C7 G

200 C8 H

201 C9 I

202 CA --

203 CB --

204 CC (unprintable character)

205 CD --

206 CE (unprintable character)

Decimal Hex EBCDIC

F-8 Modem 3600

Page 253: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Hardware Options

207 CF } (close bracket)

208 D0 J

209 D1 K

210 D2 L

211 D3 M

212 D4 N

213 D5 O

214 D6 P

215 D7 Q

216 D8 R

217 D9 --

218 DA --

219 DB --

220 DC --

221 DD --

222 DE --

223 DF --

224 E0 \ (back slash)

225 E1 --

226 E2 S

227 E3 T

228 E4 U

229 E5 V

230 E6 W

231 E7 X

232 E8 Y

233 E9 Z

234 EA --

235 EB --

236 EC (unprintable character)

237 ED --

Decimal Hex EBCDIC

Modem 3600 F-9

Page 254: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Hardware Options

238 EE --

239 EF --

240 F0 0

241 F1 1

242 F2 2

243 F3 3

244 F4 4

245 F5 5

246 F6 6

247 F7 7

248 F8 8

249 F9 9

250 FA |

251 FB --

252 FC --

253 FD --

254 FE --

255 FF (trailing pad)

Decimal Hex EBCDIC

F-10 Modem 3600

Page 255: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Appendix GAbbreviations and Acronyms

A

ABT Abort Timer OR AnswerBack Tone

ac Alternating Current ACK Acknowledgment, positiveACR Abort Call, RetryACU Automatic Call UnitADD Address FieldADDR AddressASCII American Standard Code

for Information Interchange (7 level)

AT&T American Telephone and Telegraph

B

BER Bit Error RateBERT Bit-Error-Rate-Test (set)BIL LB Bilateral LoopbackBit Binary Digitbps Bits Per SecondBSC Binary Synchronous

Communications

C

C CelsiusCA Circuit AssuranceCC Carrier ControlCCITT International Consultative

Committee for Telegraphand Telephone

CD Carrier DetectCFICB Call Failure Indication -

Local DCE BusyCFIDT Call Failure Indication -

No Dial ToneCFINT Call Failure Indication -

No Answer Back Tone CFIRT Call Failure Indication -

Ringback DetectedCh Gnd Chassis GroundCIC Connect Incoming CallCO Central Office

COS Call Originate StatusCR Carriage ReturnCRC Cyclic Redundancy CheckCRQ Call RequestCTRL Control FieldCTS, CS Clear to Send

DDAA Data Access Arrangement

(AT&T)dB, db Decibeldc Direct Current DCE Data Communications

Equipment (modem)DCD Data Carrier DetectDCPSK Differentially Coherent

Phase-Shift KeyingDIC Disregard Incoming CallDIS, DS DisableDLE Data Link EscapeDLO Data Line OccupiedDMS Digital Multiplexer SystemDOS Disk Operating SystemDPR Digit PresentDSR Data Set ReadyDTE Data Terminal EquipmentDTMF Dual Tone Multi

FrequencyDTR Data Terminal Ready

EEBCDIC Extended Binary Coded

Decimal Interchange Code (8 level)

EIA Electronic IndustriesAssociation

EIA-232C,Interface between DTE EIA-232Dand Data Interchange

CommunicationEquipment employingserial binary data

EN EnabledENQ EnquiryEOA End of Address

Modem 3600 G-1

Page 256: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Abbreviations and Acronyms

EOM End of MessageEON End of NumberEOT End of Text OR

End of TransmissionEPROM Erasable Programmable

Read Only MemoryER ErrorESC Escape KeyETB End of BlockETC External Transmit ClockETX End of TextEXT External

FFB FallbackFCC Federal Communications

CommissionFF Form FeedFGND Frame GroundFL FlagFLL Fixed loss loopFM Frequency ModulationFox Test message (The quickmessage brown fox jumps over the

lazy dog) 0123456789FSK Frequency-Shift Keying

HHDLC High Level Data Link

ControlHz Hertz (cycles per second)

IINC Incoming Call IC Industry CanadaINV InvalidINVCU Invalid Command -

Command UnknownINVMS Invalid Command -

Message Syntax ErrorINVPS Invalid Command -

Parameter Syntax ErrorINVPV Invalid Command -

Parameter Value ErrorI/O Input / OutputIS International Standard

KKBD Keyboardkbps Kilobits Per Second

LLAL Local Analog LoopbackLAPD Link Access Protocol -

D ChannelLAPM Link Access Protocol for

ModemsLB OPTS Loopback OptionsLCD Liquid Crystal Display OR

Line Current DisconnectLDL Local Digital LoopbackLED Light Emitting DiodeLF Line FeedLL Local LoopbackLO Line OccupancyLRC Longitudinal Redundancy

CheckLSD Long Space DisconnectLSO List of Stored OptionsLSV List Version

MmA MilliampsMHz MegaHertzModem Modulator / DemodulatorMR Modem Readyms Millisecond

NNAK Negative AcknowledgmentNET STAT Network StatusNRZ Non Return to ZeroNRZI Non Return to Zero InvertedNS No SignalNT Network Termination

OOH Off HookOS Out-of-Service

G-2 Modem 3600

Page 257: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Abbreviations and Acronyms

PPBX Private Branch ExchangePC Personal Computerpc Printed circuit (board)PIW Power IndicationPN Pseudo randomPND Present Next DigitPOTS Plain Old Telephone

ServicePRI PrimaryPRO Program OptionPROG, ProgrammablePRPROM Programmable -

Read Only MemoryPSK Phase Shift KeyingPSTN Public Service Telephone

NetworkPWI Power Indication

QQAM Quadrature Amplitude

Modulation

RRAD Random Access MethodRAL Remote Analog LoopbackRAM Random Access MemoryRC Receive ClockRCD Receiver-Carrier DetectorRCV, ReceiverRCVRRD Receive DataRDL Remote Digital LoopbackRI Ring IndicationRL Remote LoopbackRLO Request List of Stored

OptionsRLSD Received Line Signal

DetectorRLV Request List of Versionrms Root-Mean-SquareRMT LB Remote LoopbackRNG Ringback DetectionRO Receive OnlyROM Read Only MemoryRT Remote TerminalRTS, RS Request to SendRX Receive

SSD Send DataSDLC Synchronous Data Link

Control (IBM)SGND, Signal GroundSGSH Switch HookSNR Signal / Noise RatioSPID Service Profile IdentifierSQ Signal QualitySQM Signal Quality MonitorSS Systems StatusSTX Start of TextSYN Synchronization Character

TTC Transmit ClockTD Transmit DataTE Terminal EquipmentTEI Terminal Endpoint

Identifier TELCO Telephone CompanyTELSET Telephone SetTM Test ModeTP Test PatternTR Terminal ReadyTST TestTX Transmit

UUART Universal Asynchronous

Receiver / TransmitterUSOC Universal Service

Ordering Code

VV. CCITT Code DesignationV.24 List of definitions for

interchange circuits between data terminal equipment and datacircuit-terminatingequipment (and provisionalamendments, May 1977)

Vac Volts Alternating CurrentVAL ValidVdc Volts Direct Current

Modem 3600 G-3

Page 258: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Abbreviations and Acronyms

XX. CCITT Recommendation

DesignationXMIT TransmitXOFF Transmitter OffXON Transmitter On

G-4 Modem 3600

Page 259: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Appendix HFlash Upgrade

Upgrade your modem easily using this flash update procedure.

What You Need• A data communications software package that supports a 57.6 kbps

DTE rate and “X modem CRC” protocol• Flash upgrade file

Look for modem software upgrades on the Web at this address:

http://www.mot.com/MIMS/ISG/Service_Support/software.html

Steps For DownloadingIMPORTANT: Do not abort this process, once started!

1) Activate your data communications software package, and set up your DTE for 57.6 kbps.

2) Enter AT.You should receive an OK response message.

3) Enter AT%P1=password (8 digits)For example: AT%P1=12345678

This entry sets a soft download password. (See the AT command set for further information on the %P commands if needed.)You should receive an OK response message.

4) Enter AT$Y=password (8 digits)For example:

AT$Y=123456768You should receive this response message:

SOFTLOAD XM86-1READY

This means that your modem is ready to be upgraded.

Modem 3600 H-1

Page 260: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Flash Upgrade

5) From your terminal software package, send the “flash upgrade file” to the modem. You know the download is working because the LCD displays:

FLASH UPGRADEIN PROGRESS

NoteBe sure you use the “X modem CRC” protocol.

The modem automatically resets after the upgrade is complete. The process can take several minutes.

One of two messages returns.

DOWNLOAD OK

indicates a successful upgrade.

DOWNLOAD ERROR

indicates a problem with the download.

Enter ATI3 if you want to verify the latest software update.

Troubleshooting1) You did not choose the correct download protocol.

Response: Repeat the process.

2) The upgrade flash file is corrupted.Response: Get a clean file and redo the steps.

3) If all else fails:Response: See the “Calling Technical Support” section on page 12-2

H-2 Modem 3600

Page 261: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Service and SupportIntroductionU.S.A. customers who have questions about products or services should refer to the following sections. Non-U.S.A. customers should contact their local distributor.

Questions About Product Shipment or Technical AssistancePlease call Black Box at 724-746-5500.

To Access the Black Box Internet Web PagesAdditional company and product information can be found on our Internet Web site: http://www.blackbox.com/

Sales-Related IssuesCall Black Box at 724-746-5500.

Questions About BillingCall Black Box at 724-746-5500.

Modem 3600 Service - 1

Page 262: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •
Page 263: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Index

AAnalog loopback 10-8Answer / originate 10-7Answer mode

switching to after dialing 5-15Answering a call 3-3ASCII

character table F-1Async DTR dialer

DTR async dialer 10-11Async/sync mode

s-register settings 10-11AT command

answer 5-17AT command set

disable 5-33S-register enable/disabling 10-12

AT command statement 5-3AT commands

$$ 8-11$C=x, - 8-4$C=x, y 8-4$Cn=m 8-8$D 8-7$D=x 8-4$D? 8-4$DR 8-4$E=x 8-4$E? 8-4, 8-10$EH=pw 8-7$F=pw$pw 8-10$IBn 8-11$In 8-11$Ln=m 8-8$M 8-9$n=pw 8-11$Pn=pw$pw 8-8$Rn 8-10$S=pw 8-11

$S=x 8-4$S? 8-10$V 5-32$W 8-9$W? 8-9%A 10-20%An 6-6%B 5-28, 10-22%C 6-12, 10-17%D 6-4, 10-20%E 5-30, 10-19%L 5-29, 10-27%P 5-42%R 5-30, 10-15%T 5-43%V 5-31&D 5-20, 10-9&F 5-39&G 5-25, 10-10&L 5-36, 10-11, 10-13&M 5-25, 10-11, 10-12&P 5-26, 10-10&R 5-21, 10-9, 10-24&S 5-20, 10-9&T 5-43, 10-10&V 5-40&W 5-38&X 5-27, 10-11&Y 5-38&Z 5-40*CNx,n 5-40*DA 5-32*DB 5-36, 10-13*DG 10-13*FB 5-22, 10-12*FT 5-32, 10-12*IC 5-32*LA 10-13*LC 5-32, 10-13*MM 5-27

V.3600 Index-1

Page 264: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Index

*ND 5-40*NT 5-33, 10-12*OR 5-36, 10-7*RC 5-8, 10-17*RD 10-13*RO 5-41, 10-12*RR 5-31*TDn 5-33*TLn 5-36, 10-14, 10-15+++ 5-22+FCLASS 9-4` 10-16A 5-17, 6-11, 10-20A/ 5-4AT 5-3B 6-11, 10-25C 6-11, 10-19categories 5-1D 5-13E 5-22, 10-7F 5-23G 6-8, 10-16H 5-23, 10-7I 5-24J 6-5, 10-24K 10-18Kn 6-9L 5-24, 10-10M 5-24, 6-5, 10-10, 10-23N 6-6, 10-23O 5-25, 10-19P 10-7Q 5-6, 6-7, 10-7R 5-21, 10-19response commands 5-5T 6-10, 10-7, 10-17V 5-6, 10-7, 10-19W 5-6X 6-8, 10-10, 10-16Y 5-25, 10-9Z 5-39

Attention code (AT) 5-3Auto reliable data buffer

s-register settings 10-19

Auto retrains-register settings 10-19

Autobaud 5-3Autocallback

s-register settings 10-24Autodial backup number to dial

DTR number to dial 10-13Autodialing from front panel 3-2Auto-reliable fallback character 6-6Auto-reliable mode 6-2

BBER

s-register settings 10-15Binary File Transfer (BFT) standard 9-10Block size

maximum reliable 6-11s-register settings controlling size 10-20

Break control 6-9Buffer

disconnect delay 6-4set auto-reliable 6-11

CCall termination conditions 3-4Caller ID 5-17Carrier detect level A-3CCITT 9-1, 9-3Clock

external transmit frequency A-2internal transmit frequency A-2s-register settings 10-11synchronous transmit source of 5-27

Command Index and Defaults E-1Compression

s-register settings 10-17Configuration

remote 5-41resetting stored 5-39

Index-2 V.3600

Page 265: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Index

Configuration profile 5-40Connect messages

s-register settings 10-10Constant speed interface 6-2Cover

removal of C-1CTS

s-register settings 10-9CTS control

Clear to send (CTS) 10-9CTS flow control

s-register settings 10-16CTS follows DCD option

s-register settings 10-24CTS/RTS flow control 10-16

DData compression 6-2

V.42 bis 6-12Data link flow control 6-8Data rates A-2DCD

s-register settings 10-9DCD control

Data carrier detect (DCD) control 10-9

DCE speeds-register settings 10-21

Dialpulse ratio 5-26

Dial backups-register settings 10-13

Dial modifiers"!" 5-15P 5-14R 5-15Sn 5-16

Dial, tone/pulses-register settings 10-7

Dialing 3-2Digital interface

specifications A-1Digital loopback 10-8

Direct mode 6-3, 6-10Disconnect

buffer delay 6-4fast 5-23long space 5-25

Distinctive ring 5-18DSR

s-register settings 10-9DSR control

Data set ready (DSR) control 10-9DTE

connection of 2-2serial port adjust 6-5

DTE fallbackS-register enable/disable 10-12

DTE flow controls-register settings 10-16

DTE/DCE constant speeds-register settings 10-24

DTRs-register settings 10-9

DTR controlData terminal ready (DTR) control 10-9

DTR dialers-register settings 10-11

DTR in autoanswer 5-17

EEcho 10-7

local character 5-22online character 5-23

EIA-578 9-1, 9-3Environmental conditions A-1Error control 6-1Escape sequence

Changing from data mode to command mode 5-22

FFactory option set

loading 5-39

V.3600 Index-3

Page 266: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Index

Factory option setsset #1 E-28

Fallback character 6-6Fault isolation procedure D-1Fax commands

class1 quick reference E-15D 11-5, 11-6, 11-7, 11-10, 11-12quick reference E-15, E-19

fax initialization command string 9-2Fax mode

features of 1-3Fax Modulation 9-7Fax modulation rates A-2Fax operation 11-5, 11-6, 11-7, 11-10, 11-12Fax rates A-2fax transmit/receive modes 9-7Features 1-2Flow control 6-3

data link 6-8s-register settings 10-16

Flow control, serial port 6-74-wire operation 5-33Full duplex 5-34Fuse 12-1

GGround C-4Guard tones

s-register settings 10-10

HHDLC data framing 9-3

IIC requirements viInactivity timer 6-10Installation 2-1Internet web pages 1

JJack

DIAL pin functions B-1TELSET/LEASED LINE pin functions B-1

LLAPM 6-1LCD menu 4-2Leased line

s-register settings 10-13Leased lines 2-8Line current disconnect

s-register settings 10-13Line equalization A-3Line type

s-register settings 10-11Link layer protocols A-3Local analog loopback, DTE commanded

s-register settings 10-13Local character echo

s-register settings 10-7Logon

Security 8-11Long space disconnect 10-9

s-register settings 10-9

MMake/break ratio

s-register settings 10-10MNP 6-1, 10-23MNP compression

s-register settings 10-19MNP or normal mode 6-9MODEM AND TELEPHONE LINE CHECK D-2Modem Options command 11-10Modulation rates A-2

Index-4 V.3600

Page 267: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Index

NNormal mode 6-2, 6-10

OOff hook

command description 5-23Offline command mode 5-2Online command mode 5-2Operating mode selection 6-6Operating mode status

s-registers settings 10-23Operation with security

local 8-3Remote 8-2

Option Sets E-28Options

retaining/restoring 5-41Options retained / restored 10-12

PParity

s-register settings 10-19Password 8-3, 8-6

change 8-4default 8-7delete 8-4set 8-4, 8-8

Pause 5-14, 10-5, 10-6Phone Jack Descriptions B-1Phone jack pin descriptions B-1Power

AC connection 2-2DC connection 2-2modem requirements A-1

Power-up procedure 3-1PRK 11-12PRO 11-10Profile

active 5-37factory 5-37stored 5-37

Profilefax operation 9-3

Protocolcompatible with 1-2

Protocol commands 6-3Protocol response messages

s-register settings 10-19PSTN

connection 2-7

RRate renegotiation 5-31Reliable mode 6-1Remote configuration

security 5-42Remote digital loop request

s-register settings 10-10Remote digital loopback 10-8Remote digital loopback, DTE commanded

s-register settings 10-13Request List of Stored Options 11-13Response messages 5-6, 10-7, 10-10Restore Factory Settings 11-12Returning the modem 12-2Revision Level 5-31RI LED -- ring indicator

s-register settings 10-19Ring indicator

command description 5-21RTS/CTS delay A-3

SSave Current Settings 11-12Security 8-1

disabling/enabling 8-4display extended feature status 8-9display status 8-10display user status 8-10enable/disable high 8-7extended features 8-9factory reset 8-10

V.3600 Index-5

Page 268: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Index

levels 8-5passwords 8-6remote code 5-42remote logon procedure 8-11removing a user 8-10set levels 8-8setting passwords 8-8superuser status 8-11verify user 8-11

Serial Number 5-32Serial port

DTE adjust 6-5Serial Port flow control 6-7Signal options

displaying received 5-40Size A-1Speaker

s-register settings 10-10Specifications A-1S-register

autoanswer 10-4hexadecimal/decimal values 10-2

S-register commandsSn.#=v 10-4Sn=^v 10-3Sn=v 10-3Sn? 10-3Sn?^ 10-3

S-registerschanging values 10-3individual bit command 10-4quick reference E-21reading 10-3S0 10-4S1 10-4S10 10-6S11 10-6S12 10-6S16 10-8S18 10-8S2 10-5S21 10-9S22 10-10S23 10-10

S25 10-11S26 10-11S27 10-11S28 10-11S29 10-12S3 10-5S30 10-12S32 10-13S34 10-13S35 10-13S4 10-5S44 10-14S45 10-14S49 10-14S5 10-5S50 10-14S52 10-14, 10-15S53 10-15S54 10-16S56 10-17S57 10-17S58 10-17S59 10-18S6 10-5S60 10-19S61 10-19S62 10-20S63 10-20S64 10-20S67 10-21S69 10-22S7 10-5S70 10-23S71 10-23S72 10-24S73 10-24S74 10-24S75 10-24S76 10-25S77 10-25S78 10-25S79 10-25S8 10-6S80 10-26

Index-6 V.3600

Page 269: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Index

S81 10-27S88 10-28S9 10-6S91 10-29

Strapsground option C-4

SuperuserSee Security 8-11

Sync clock selection 10-11

TTable 5-1 5-9Technical support 12-2Teephone line

specifications A-1Telco connection A-3Telephone

line connection 2-6Telephone Interface D-1Telephone number

storing 5-40Temperature A-1Test, system 10-8Testing A-3Tests 7-1Timer

inactivity 6-10Transmit break/set break length 6-11Transmit level

dial line 5-33leased line 5-36

Transmit output level A-22-wire operation 5-34

VV.25 ASCII / EBCDIC

s-register settings 10-12V.25 bis

response messages E-26V.25 bis auto dialer commands

quick reference E-24V.25 bis Autodialer 11-7, 11-8, 11-9,

11-14V.25 bis autodialer commands

quick reference E-26V.25 NRZ/NRZI

s-register settings 10-12V.25 protocol selection

s-register settings 10-12V.25 VAL

s-register settings 10-12V.32 fast train 5-32

s-register enable/disable 10-12V.42 optional detect phase 6-5V.42 bis 6-1Version level 5-24

WWeb pages 1Word length --7/8 bit

s-register settings 10-19

XXON/XOFF 6-7, 6-8, 9-4XON/XOFF characters

s-register settings 10-16XON-XOFF characters from DTE

s-register settings 10-14

V.3600 Index-7

Page 270: Modem User’s Guidec)feb04_20274.pdf · • AT command set • V.25 bis autodialer • Configuration memory • Phone number storage . Introduction Modem 3600 1-3 • Caller ID •

Index

Index-8 V.3600